VK401 - Power strip ATEN - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL VK401 ATEN

VK Series & Configurator

ATEN Control System User Manual

Compliance Statements

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

The device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Caution

Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Warning

Operation of this equipment in a residential environment could cause radio interference.

Achtung

Industry Canada Statement

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

CAN ICES-003 (A) / NMB-003 (A)

RoHS

This product is RoHS compliant.

User Information

Online Registration

Be sure to register your product at our online support center:

International http://eservice.aten.com

Telephone Support

For telephone support, call this number:

International 886-2-86	92-6959
China 86-400-810-0-8	10
Japan 81-3-5615-581	1
Korea 82-2-467-6789
North America 1-888-	999-ATEN ext 4988
	1-949-428-1111

User Notice

All information, documentation, and specifications contained in this manual are subject to change without prior notification by the manufacturer. The manufacturer makes no representations or warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any warranties as to merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Any of the manufacturer's software described in this manual is sold or licensed as is. Should the programs prove defective following their purchase, the buyer (and not the manufacturer, its distributor, or its dealer), assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing, repair and any incidental or consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software.

The manufacturer of this system is not responsible for any radio and/or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this device. It is the responsibility of the user to correct such interference.

The manufacturer is not responsible for any damage incurred in the operation of this system if the correct operational voltage setting was not selected prior to operation. PLEASE VERIFY THAT THE VOLTAGE SETTING IS CORRECT BEFORE USE.

Product Information

For information about all ATEN products and how they can help you connect without limits, visit ATEN on the Web or contact an ATEN Authorized Reseller. Visit ATEN on the Web for a list of locations and telephone numbers:

International http://www.aten.com

North America http://www.aten-usa.com

Package Contents

Check to make sure that all the components are in working order. If you encounter any problem, please contact your dealer.

VK0100

◆ 1 VK0100 8-Button Control Pad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 4 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK0200

◆ 1 VK0200 12-Button Control Pad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 4 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK1100A

◆ 1 VK1100A Control Box Gen. 2
◆ 7 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 5-pin terminal block
◆ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK1200

◆ 1 VK1200 Compact Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN
◆ 7 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 2 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 5-pin terminal block
◆ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK2100A

◆ 1 VK2100A Control Box Gen. 2
◆ 1 rack mount kit
◆ 12 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 4 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 3 5-pin terminal block
◆ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK2200

◆ 1 VK2200 Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN

◆ 1 rack mount kit
◆ 20 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 6 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 4 5-pin terminal block
◆ 1 power cord
◆ 1 foot pad set (4 pcs)
◆ 1 user instructions

VK112EU

◆ 1 VK112EU 12-Button Keypad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 1 2-pin terminal block
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK108US

◆ 1 VK108US 8-Button Keypad
◆ 1 button pack
◆ 1 2-pin terminal block
◆ 1 faceplate
◆ 1 user instructions

VK224

◆ 1 VK224 4-Port Serial Expansion Box
◆ 1 power adapter
◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 1 user instructions

VK236

◆ 1 VK236 6-Port IR / Serial Expansion Box

◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 6 3-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 user instructions

VK248

◆ 1 VK248 8-Channel Relay Expansion Box
◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 9 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 user instructions

VK258

◆ 1 VK258 8-Channel Digital I/O Expansion Box
◆ 1 mounting kit
◆ 9 2-pin terminal blocks
◆ 1 user instructions

VK320

◆ 1 VK320 8" Touch Panel
◆ 1 86-type junction box with screws
◆ 1 90° RJ-45 cable adapter
◆ 1 user instructions

VK330

Due to a package contents change, you may receive one of the following package editions:

Latest Package Edition

◆ 1 VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
◆ 1 90° RJ-45 cable adapter
◆ 1 user instructions

Previous Package Edition

◆ 1 VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
◆ 1 user instructions

Contents

Compliance Statements ...... ii

User Information ....iv

Online Registration .....iv

Telephone Support .....iv

User Notice iv

Product Information v

Package Contents ...... v

VK0100....v

VK0200 v

VK1100A....vi

VK1200....vi

VK2100A....vi

VK2200....vi

VK112EU ...... vii

VK108US ...... vii

VK224....vii

VK236....vii

VK248......viii

VK258......viii

VK320......viii

VK330......viii

Contents x

About this Manual ...... xviii

Conventions xx

Terminology xx

What's New in Version 3.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

1. Introduction

Overview....1

Benefits....2

Intelligent Control 2

Optimized Performance 2

Simplified Setup 2

Effortless Expandability 2

User-Oriented Convenience 3

On-the-Go Control 3

Features 4

Controllers 4

ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 4

ATEN Control Pad 5

ATEN Configurator 6

Control Interfaces 6

ATEN Keypads 6

ATEN Touch Panel 7

ATEN Control System App ....7

Accessories 8

Access Inspector (VK401) 8

Requirements 9

Accessories 10

2. Hardware Setup and Panel Operation

ATEN Control Box....11

VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 Panel Components ..... 11

VK1100A Front View .... 11

VK1200 Front View 12

VK2100A Front View 12

VK2200 Front View 12

VK1100A Rear View 14

VK1200 Rear View 14

VK2100A Rear View 14

VK2200 Rear View 14

Placement 17

Desktop 17

Rack Mounting 17

Control Box Connections .....23

VK1100A Installation Diagram 25

VK1200 Installation Diagram 26

VK2100A Installation Diagram 27

VK2200 Installation Diagram 28

12 V DC Power Output .....29

Relay 32

Using Self-supplied Power....32

Application: Control Using External Relays .....34

IR / Serial 35

One IR Transmitter 36

Two IR Transmitters 36

Digital I/O 37

RS-232 (3-Pin) 39

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (DB-9) 40

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (5-Pin) 41

Ethernet / Control LAN 42

ATEN Control Pad. 43

Panel Components 43

VK0100 43

VK0200 43

LED Indications 45

Installing the Control Pads 46

Wiring Information 51

RS-232 Serial Connection 51

Relay Connections 52

Digital Input Device 53

Ethernet 54

ATEN Expansion Box 55

Control Interface Devices 56

ATEN Keypad 56

Hardware Overview 57

LED Indications 59

Layout Examples....60

Installing ATEN Keypad 61

ATEN 8" Touch Panel (VK320) 65

Hardware Overview 65

Mounting the VK320 Touch Panel. 66

Configuring Network Settings 67

Changing the Interface Language 67

Updating Control System App 67

Upgrading Firmware for ATEN Touch Panel 68

Other Configurations & Actions 68

ATEN 10" Touch Panel (VK330) 69

Hardware Overview 69

Mounting the Touch Panel 70

Installing the Touch Panel 72

Operating the Touch Panel 72

Changing the Interface Language 73

Configuring the Network Settings 73

Updating Control System App 73

Upgrading Firmware for ATEN Touch Panel. 73

Accessories 75

VK401 Access Inspector 75

Components 75

Installing an Access Inspector to a VK330 Touch Panel .....76

3. Web-based Configuration and Control

Overview....77

Determining the IP Address of the Controller 77

LCD Panel 78

IP Installer 78

Login 79

Dashboard 79

Overview 79

Settings 81

General 82

Licenses for Mobile Control 84

Storage 85

Access Viewers in Web URL for Remote Control .....85

Access 87

Monitor 89

Network 89

Working as a DHCP Server 90

Connections 90

Schedule 91

Security 92

4. ATEN Configurator (VK6000)

Overview 93

Installing ATEN Configurator....93

Getting Started Tasks 96

Main Screen 98

Overview 98

Menu Bar 99

Creating Projects 106

Configuring Managed Devices 109

Overview....109

Left Sidebar 110

Device Configuration List 111

Adding Devices to the Device Configuration List 113

Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator ..... 113

Via ATEN Device Library or My Library 113

Via the Properties Column 114

Adding KNX Devices 115

Adding a KNX Device 115

Importing an ETS Project 116

Device Properties 116

Controller Properties 116

Expansion Box (Expander) 117

Serial Device Properties 118

I/O Device Properties. 119

IR/Relay Device Properties 120

Ethernet Device Properties 121

Migrating Devices to another Controller .....124

Library 125

Device Library 126

Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer) 127

Getting Started with Configuring Viewers ..... 127

The Design Tab 128

Viewer List 129

Monitor / Control List. 131

Configuration Panel 132

Library 132

Simulator 132

Adding Viewers 133

Deciding How Many & What Viewer to Create ..... 133

Configuring a Viewer 134

Adding / Removing a Page 137

Configuring a Subpage 138

Duplicating a Viewer 141

Viewer Control Objects 141

Understanding Control Objects 141

Configuring Control Objects 142

Control Object Properties 145

Buttons 145

Groups 149

Labels 150

Slider Bars 151

PowerPoint Control and Media Control Templates ..... 153

Images 154

Layering Images 155

Videos 156

Dial Kit 160

Frame & Line 162

Object Properties for ATEN Keypad / Control Pad 163

Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions 166

Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions 166

Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions 168

Functions 169

Device Functions 171

Applications of Device Functions 173

Example: Configuring actions of dial keys. 173

Advanced Functions 174

Applications of Advanced Functions 176

Set Flag 176

Condition 177

Change Button State 183

Change Label 185

Change Group Button State 186

Change Slider Bar Level 187

Change Button Name 188

Library 190

Graphic Library 191

Button 191

Background 192

Image (Device Icon) 192

Device Interface 193

Flag 194

Monitor 196

Understanding Monitor 196

Monitor Page Options 196

Condition Types 198

Functions 201

Creating an If Monitor 202

Creating a Switch Monitor 205

Creating a Bypass Monitor 209

Creating a While Loop Monitor 211

Creating a Professional Monitor ....212

Duplicating a Created Monitor ....217

Macro 218

Scheduled Events 220

Creating a Scheduled Event .....220

Duplicating a Scheduled Event 221

Variables 222

Understanding Variables 222

Creating a Variable for Devices that Return Feedback Messages .. 223

Creating a Variable for Devices that Do Not Return Feedback Messages 225

Creating a Button for Bypassing Feedback to a Variable .....229

Timers 231

Configuring a Timer Event. 232

Duplicating a Created Timer 236

Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Overview 237

Unizon™ 237

Monitor ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™. . . . . 237

Control ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™ ..... 237

Enabling Monitoring and Control via Unizon™ 238

Creating a Monitor Item 239

Creating a Control Item ....242

Removing a Monitor / Control Item 244

The Upload Tab 245

Viewing Controller Information 247

5. ATEN Database Generator

Overview 249

Accessing the Database Generator 249

My Library .251

Function Tabs 252

Controls on the My Library Window 254

Editing / Adding a New Device 256

Serial Device....257

Text Command Tools 260

IR Device....261

Digital Output Device 263

Relay Device 264

Ethernet Device 265

Testing Commands 270

Configuring Queries 272

ATEN Library 274

6. Remote PC Control

Overview....275

Specifications 275

Setting Up Remote PC Control 277

Installing ControlAssist on Target Computers. 277

Adding Target Computers to the Control System ..... 280

Configuring a Control Interface 282

Supported PC Control Actions 286

7. ATEN Control System App

Overview....289

Requirements 289

Installing the App 289

Demo/Start Screen 290

WinViewer1 / iPad / Android1 292

Demo 294

Control Pages 294

Overview 295

Welcome (List of Viewers) Page 295

Manage Viewer 296

Manage LAN Device 297

Controller....298

Simulating Viewer Controls with Demo Mode 300

Log Report 302

Preferences 303

General 303

Receiving Room Usage Notifications from ATEN Room Booking

System 305

Remote RBS Control....305

AppSwitcher 306

Report History 309

Information 310

Download Viewer 311

Downloading Viewers 312

8. SSH Commands

Overview 313

Establishing an SSH Session with Expansion Box 313

Command Syntax 314

Command List 315

Configuring Serial Settings ....315

Configuring Relay Settings ....317

Configuring I/O Settings 318

Appendix

Safety Instructions....321

General 321

Rack Mount 323

Technical Support 324

International 324

North America 324

Specifications 325

VK0100....325

VK0200 325

VK1100A 328

VK1200....331

VK2200....334

VK320 337

VK330 339

VK401 340

VK224 341

VK236 343

VK248 344

VK258 346

Control System Project Specifications 347

CAD and Panel Cutout Diagrams .....348

VK0100 348

VK0200 352

VK108US 356

VK112EU 360

Datapoint Types 364

ATEN Control Box Reset Button 367

Windows OS Button Limitation 368

ATEN Standard Warranty Policy ....369

About this Manual

This user manual is provided to help you get the most from your ATEN Control System. It covers all aspects of installation, configuration, and operation of the ATEN controllers, configuration software, and their accessories, including:

Product Category Model Number Description
Controllers	Control Box VK1100A	ATEN Compact	Control Box Gen. 2
		VK2100A ATEN Control Box Gen. 2
		VK1200 ATEN Compact Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN
		VK2200 ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN
	ATEN Control Pad VK0100 8-Button Control Pad (US, 1 Gang)
				VK0200 12-Button Control Pad (EU, 2 Gang)
Control Interfaces	ATEN Keypad VK108US 8-Button Keypad (US, 1 Gang)
				VK112EU 12-Button Keypad (EU, 2 Gang)
	ATEN Touch Panel VK320 8" Touch Panel
				VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
ATEN Expansion Box		VK224 4-Port Serial Expansion
		VK236 6-Port IR/Serial Expansion Box
		VK248 8-Channel Relay Expansion Box
		VK258 8-Channel Digital I/O Expansion Box
Software	ATEN Configurator	VK6000	An application used for creating and configuring control system projects, control functions, and visual design of control interfaces (Viewers).
	Database Generator	- A repository used for creating and storing drivers and operation commands of controlled devices for reuse when configuring Viewers using ATEN Configurator.
	ControlAssist	- An application installed at a PC for it to be remotely control by ATEN Control System.
	Control System App	- An application used on mobile devices for centralized control of multiple rooms.

Chapter 1, Introduction

Introduces you to the ATEN Control System, its purpose, features, and benefits, and the panel components of the Control Box and Control Pad.

Chapter 2, Hardware Setup

Provides the necessary steps to set up the ATEN Control System, including the detailed wiring of the different types of hardware interface connections.

Chapter 3, Browser Operation

Provides information about the Control Box's and Control Pad's web interface and its functions for remotely configuring specific parts of the ATEN Control System.

Chapter 4, ATEN Configurator (VK6000)

Provides a complete description of the ATEN Configurator (VK6000) software and its configuration / operation features for managing the ATEN Control System.

Chapter 5, ATEN Database Generator

Provides a complete description of the Database Generator software and its functions for adding new devices to the VK6000 device library.

Chapter 6, Remote PC Control

Explains how to set up your computer as a licensed device for remote control and the control actions supported.

Chapter 7, ATEN Control System App

Provides a complete description of the ATEN mobile app, the license required, and its functions and features for remotely operating devices connected to the ATEN Control System.

Chapter 8, SSH Commands

Explains how to set up command-line interface to control and configure ATEN Expansion Boxes and provides information on command syntax and definitions.

Appendix

Provides specifications and other technical information regarding the ATEN Control System.

Note:

• Read this manual thoroughly and follow the installation and operation procedures carefully to prevent any damage to the unit and/or connected devices.
• The product may be updated, with features and functions added, improved, or removed since the release of this manual. For an up-to-date user manual, visit http://www.aten.com/global/en/

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

Monospaced Indicates text that you should key in.

[] Indicates keys you should press. For example, [Enter] means to press the Enter key. If keys need to be chorded, they appear together in the same bracket with a plus sign between them: [Ctrl+Alt].

1. Numbered lists represent procedures with sequential steps.

◆ Bullet lists provide information, but do not involve sequential steps.

Indicates consecutive selecting options (such as on a menu or dialog box). For example, Start > Run means to open the Start menu, and then select Run.

Indicates critical information.

Terminology

Terminology Description
ATEN Controller, controller	ATEN Controller or controller refers to all models of ATEN Control Box and ATEN Control Pad.
ATEN Control Box, Control Box	ATEN Control Box or Control Box refers to all models of ATEN Control Box and Compact Control Box (Gen. 1 & 2).
Viewer A Viewer is a software control interface users customize to control and operate devices in their control system. A Viewer is configurable using ATEN Configurator and applied to a supported control device, such as a mobile device, ATEN Keypad, or ATEN Control Pad, for it to function.
Project A project is a configuration file, generated using ATEN Configurator to specify settings of an ATEN Control System, including one or multiple controllers, managed devices, and control interfaces.

What's New in Version 3.7

The firmware version 3.7 supports the following new and improved functions and features:

New & Improved Feature For More Information
Viewer
Supports web access to Viewers For more information, see Access Viewers in Web URL for Remote Control, page 85.
Supports portrait mode for Viewer design	For more information, see Configuring a Viewer, page 134.
Supports quick connection to controllers at startup	For more information, see General, page 303.
VK330 Touch Panel
Supports access inspection using VK401 Access Inspector	For more information, see VK401 Access Inspector, page 75.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 1

Introduction

Overview

The ATEN Control System is an Ethernet-based management system that incorporates ATEN controllers (ATEN Control Box and/or ATEN Control Pad) and control interfaces (ATEN Keypads and ATEN Touch Panel) for connection, configuration, and operation of all hardware devices in a room or large facility to provide convenient control effortlessly via a mobile device or an ATEN Touch Panel. The ATEN controller works as the main controller that provides connectivity to hardware devices commonly seen in settings such as meeting rooms, conferences, boardrooms, and classrooms.

After connecting the hardware, the ATEN Configurator (VK6000) provides simple setup of the devices with easy step-by-step configuration. The ATEN Touch Panel and ATEN Control System app, for iOS, Android or Windows mobile devices, then empowers you with the mobility to control all hardware devices remotely, whenever and however you like.

ATEN Control Box/Control Pad can be easily deployed into an existing installation and integrate seamlessly with ATEN VanCryst pro-AV products and nearly any other hardware devices found in a room, including AV equipment, lighting, conference systems, air conditioning, motion sensors, power switches and many more. The controller serves as the central platform where hardware devices are connected — to be monitored, managed, and controlled directly via a tailor-made GUI — a Viewer — from any iOS, Android, or Windows mobile device or an ATEN Touch Panel.

The control system project and its control interface is configured using an intuitive program — the ATEN Configurator (VK6000). The ATEN Configurator walks you through configuring the hardware, designing the control interface (Viewer), and uploading this configuration to the controller. Through an Ethernet connection, the ATEN Control System app enables you to edit and download Viewers from the controller via a point-n-tap user interface. The use of each Viewer is protected with password authentication to ensure secure access.

The ATEN Control System is the perfect solution for any meeting rooms, conferences, boardrooms, classrooms, and any other room setting that requires a centralized, mobile control of a variety of hardware devices through streamlined Ethernet-based management system with optimum efficiency and performance.

Benefits

Intelligent Control

The ATEN Control System makes the interactions between your hardware devices smarter. Programmable actions and triggers provide a fully automated series of advanced operations that allow your devices to respond to each other intelligently, making your meeting solution run smarter and smoother.

Optimized Performance

The ATEN Control System offers communication protocol optimization that not only maintains a near-zero response time but also features data encryption for ensured protection.

Simplified Setup

No matter how large the room or how complicated the hardware, the ATEN Control System can be deployed in 3 easy steps: connecting the hardware, configuring the system, and uploading Viewers for remote control access. Through an intuitive GUI, the process for setting up the controls for every room is simple and customizable, which is fulfilled via straightforward, predefined commands and macros that do not require programming skills.

Effortless Expandability

With a range of expansion boxes available, the ATEN Control System installation can be expanded to accommodate additional hardware devices with various interfaces, such as serial, relay, and IR. In addition, the ATEN Library is preloaded with 10,000+ device drivers, and can also be expanded freely by

adding new device drivers through the Database Generator for convenient management, however the size or scope of the installation may be.

User-Oriented Convenience

With its advanced, single-software design, the ATEN Control System offers a comprehensive library of actions and design elements for creating intuitive control panel interfaces for convenient, customizable remote access and control by any mobile device. Various support services also provided with the solution include driver downloads, database generation, upgrade tools, etc. — to help system integrators build easy-to-control applications in a wide range of scenarios effortlessly.

On-the-Go Control

Intuitive system control can start from one room and scale up to multiple rooms, both within the same area and even across regions. Different rooms can be effectively controlled by switching between Viewers, with simple point-n-tap operations, on an iOS, Android and/or Windows mobile. For optimal flexibility, multiple mobile devices can be authorized to control the same room or multiple rooms, providing enhanced mobility.

Features

Controllers

ATEN Control Box Gen. 2

- High performance quad-core CPU processor for designing and controlling complex projects

- Dual LAN design to support secure communication requirements (applicable to VK1200 / VK2200 only)

- Equipped with various connection interfaces for hardware-software integration and mobility of control:

Interface VK1	100A VK1200	VK2100A VK2200
Serial Port 2 2	6 8
IR/Serial Port 2	2 4 8
Relay Channel	4	4	4	8
I/O Channel 2	2 4 8
Ethernet Port	1	1 LAN1 Control LAN	1	1 LAN1 Control LAN

◆ DC outputs for power supply connections:
♦ VK1100A / VK1200: equipped with 1 DC output
♦ VK2100A / VK2200: equipped with 4 DC outputs
USB port for easy Viewer upload
- LCD display shows the option for configuration and information display (only applicable to VK1200 / VK2200)
◆ IR Learning for adding IR device drivers
◆ Support for native KNX IP for building management systems
- TCP, UDP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, WebSocket, ONVIF and PJLink compliant
◆ Open API for effortless integration with 3rd party systems or software
◆ Centralized control and management of devices with ATEN Unizon™
◆ Project file backup
- Web GUI for easy system configuration
◆ Support for SSH communication for data monitoring

◆ LED indication of connection and hardware status
◆ 2 free licenses for mobile control

Note: If you need more than two licenses for mobile control, contact your local sales representative for more information.

ATEN Control Pad

• Equipped with various connection interfaces for hardware-software integration and mobility of control:
  ◆ 2 RS-232 serial ports
  ◆ 2 relay channels
  ◆ 1 digital input port
  ◆ 1 Ethernet port
• Designed to mount in 1-gang US type junction boxes (for VK0100); 2-gang EU type and MK type junction boxes (for VK0200)
  ◆ Fully customizable layout
  ♦ VK0100: 14 layout variations using 4 to 8 buttons
  ♦ VK0200: 125 layout variations using 6 to 12 buttons
• Customizable button text engraving service
  ◆ Available in black or white color
  ◆ Supports native KNX IP for building management systems
• TCP, UDP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, WebSocket, ONVIF and PJLink compliant
• Enables centralized control and management of devices with ATEN Unizon™
  ◆ Supports project file backup
• Web GUI for easy system configuration
  ◆ Supports SSH communication for data monitoring
  ◆ LED indication of connection and hardware status
• Dual-color LEDs for clear indication in dark environments
  ◆ Power over Ethernet (PoE) or DC power

ATEN Configurator

• Simple Viewer setup with easy configuration steps via intuitive GUI
• Customizable GUI to be used on mobile devices and PC
• Supports ControlAssist that allows PC control (PC shutdown, media files, PowerPoint files)

Note: For details on the supported PC control actions, see Supported PC Control Actions, page 286.

Built-in Database Generator for device driver setup and overall device management.
Built-in ATEN Library comprising 10,000+ device drivers and complete ATEN product drivers
Event scheduling
- Two-way communication enables user-defined event monitoring to automatically trigger the next actions
- Test tool to verify commands in action before uploading the Viewer to the ATEN controller
◆ Simulator to simulate and review the customized GUI before uploading

Control Interfaces

ATEN Keypads

◆ Fully customizable layout
◆ VK108US: 14 layout variations using 4 to 8 buttons
- VK112EU: 125 layout variations using 6 to 12 buttons
- Designed to mount in 1-gang US type junction boxes (for VK108US); 2-gang EU type and MK type junction boxes (for VK112EU)
◆ Available in black or white color
◆ System LED indicators for quick connection status check
- Dual-color LEDs for clear indication in dark environments
◆ Easy ID pairing with ATEN controller for Ethernet communication
- Scalability – an ATEN controller can connect up to 8 Keypads
♦ Versatile modes support flexible behavior settings for each button
- Intuitive Web GUI for easy configuration
◆ Redundant power supplies (DC power and PoE)
- Button engraving service

ATEN Touch Panel

♦ 8" touch panel (VK320) / 10.1 touch panel (VK330)
- Natively installed with ATEN Control System app and designed for the integrated use with ATEN Control System
◆ Supports AppSwitcher to allow multiple apps to be switched and operated
- Integrated with ATEN Unizon and ATEN Room Booking System to display room usage and operating status
- Allows administrators to centrally control multiple rooms via Viewers
- Restricts user access to Viewers with password authentication
- Synchronization of Viewers used among multiple ATEN Touch Panels, mobile devices and tablet computers
- Supports demo mode to allow demonstration of the solution’s most important functions without the need to connect the touch panel to a controller
- Screen Saver helps save energy and prolongs the lifetime of the touch screen
- Supports Display Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), ONVIF, and ATEN VE89 series video preview

Note: The function is only applicable to VK1200 / VK2200.

◆ PoE+ (IEEE 802.3at) compliant
- VK320 supports in-wall design (perfectly fits in building decoration) and desktop mount using VK102
- Side power LED – features the indicator in the dark place (only applicable to VK302)
- VK330 supports mounting on wall (using VK302 Wall Mount Kit), tabletop (using VK304 Tabletop Kit), and any standard VESA 75 x 75 mm mounts

ATEN Control System App

• Allows administrators central control of multiple rooms via Viewers on a mobile device or tablet computer
• Restrict user access to Viewers via password authentication
• Synchronization of system controls amongst multiple mobile devices and tablet computers

• Any iOS, Android, or Windows mobile device can be used to control the system – no need to purchase costly exclusive user panels

• Supports demo mode to allow demonstration of the solution’s most important functions without the need to connect the touch panel to a controller

• Screen Saver helps save energy and prolongs the lifetime of the touch screen
  ◆ Supports Display Real-time Streaming Protocol (RTSP), ONVIF, and ATEN VE89 series video preview

Note: The function is only applicable to VK1200 / VK2200.

Accessories

Access Inspector (VK401)

• An add-on compact accessory that works with ATEN VK430 10.1" RBS Panel and VK330 10.1" Touch Panel
  ◆ Operates at 13.56 MHz
  ◆ Supports multiple standards — ISO 14443A/B and ISO 15693
• Reads smart cards — Mifare and Felica

• Contactless access control with high levels of security and hygiene

• Only authorized users can scan cards to book, check in, lock, or unlock meeting rooms and facilitate conference room automation

• Helps collect valuable data, including meeting attendance list and meeting duration
• Keeps track of meeting records for centralized management

Reports can be sent to designated users regularly on a daily, weekly, monthly, or quarterly basis

Requirements

Prepare the following equipment and make sure your equipment meets the minimum requirements specified below.

◆ Hardware devices to be controlled by your ATEN controller

Bidirectional RS-232/422/485 serial devices
- One-way IR or serial transmitter hardware devices (for Control Box only)
♦ Relay hardware devices
◆ Digital input hardware devices (for VK1200 / VK2100 / VK2200 and Control Pad only)
◆ Digital output hardware devices (for VK1200 / VK2100 / VK2200 only)
- Ethernet-controlled PJLink, Telnet, ONVIF, TCP, UDP, HTTP, or HTTPS devices
♦ KNX-interface IP devices

♦ Cables

One Cat 5e/6 Ethernet cable for connecting to the local area network
- (Optional) Standard straight-through cables for serial devices with DB9 connectors

- A computer for configuring your ATEN Control System

◆ Make sure the computer runs Windows 7, 8, 8.1 or 10
Make sure to install .NET Framework version 4.5 or later on the computer before using the ATEN Database Generator

♦ (Optional) Remote control through 10 or 32 mobile devices respectively for Control Pad or VK1200 / VK2200

Note: A license is required for each mobile device. For detailed information, see Licenses for Mobile Control, page 84.

Accessories

Optionally purchase ATEN accessories to enhance the functionality of your Control System. For more information, visit the ATEN website. Contact your ATEN dealer to purchase these accessories.

Model Description
2XRT-0004G Full Range	IR Emitter (1.8 m)
2X-031G Single Rack Mount Kit for VK1100
2X-049G Single Rack Mount Kit for VK1200
2X-021G Dual Rack Mount Kit for VK1200
SA0141 DB9-F to RJ45-F	Adapter
SA0145 RJ45-F to DB9-M	Adapter

Chapter 2

Hardware Setup and Panel Operation

1. Important safety information regarding the placement of this device is provided on Safety Instructions, page 321. Please review it before proceeding.

2. Make sure that the power to all devices connected to the installation are turned off. You must unplug the power cords of any computers that have the Keyboard Power On function.

ATEN Control Box

VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 Panel Components

VK1100A Front View

5 RELAY UO IR SERIAL LAN DC UNLOAD IN LEARN USB RESET ID POWER 1 2 1 1 1 2 Tx Rx 3 4 2 2 SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 10 11 12 14 CONTROL BOX GEN. 2 VK1100A

VK1200 Front View

ATEN 7 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 141311

VK2100A Front View

CONTROL BOX 14.2 WATER 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 14

VK2200 Front View

TIEN 5 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 13 14

No.	Component Description				tion
1 relay LEDs					♦Lights green to indicate an active device connection or signals being transmitted.♦Blinks green once to indicate system startup, with the buzzer beeping once
2 I/O LEDs
3 IR / serial LEDs
4 serial LEDs
5	L	A	N	L	Lights green to indicate successful connection to the network.
6	S	y	s	t	Blinks green to indicate that the system is running without issues.

No.	Component Description
7	Control LAN LED	Lights green to indicate successful connection to the network.
8	DC output overload LED	Lights orange to indicate DC output exceeding the maximum output threshold, with the buzzer beeping for 3 seconds.Note: Please unplug any of the connected devices to keep its total output under 12 V DC, 1 A / 2A and restart the unit.
9 IR	receiver / LED Passes	es the functions of a remote control to the Control Box learning mode. The distance between the IR remote and the receiver window should be kept under 10 cm with a direct line of sight.The LED blinks green to indicate the unit is receiving signals from an IR remote controlThe LED lights green to indicate entering learning mode, or IR learning success with the buzzer beeping once.
10 USB port / LED Plugs		in a USB device to upload Viewers (configured by the VK6000) to the Control Box.The LED blinks green to indicate that Viewers are being uploaded, and lights green to indicate a successful upload, with the buzzer beeping once upon USB plug-in and once upon upload success.The LED lights orange to indicate upload failure, with the buzzer beeping 3 times for no available file found or upload failure.Note: Control Box Gen. 2 is compatible with USB drivers in NTFS and FAT32 format.
11 reset button		Clear all settings but network and license: Press and hold until the front panel LEDs blink once, with the buzzer beeping once (about 8 seconds). The LEDs and buzzer will trigger once more when the reset is complete.Reset network settings: Short press once.Note: For more reset button functions, see page 367.
12 Control Box ID Switch		Use the switch to set an ID for the Control Box.
13 LCD panel and buttons		Use the Up, Down, and Enter buttons to display the unit's system information, and set its ID.
14 power LED Lights green when the unit is turned on.

VK1100A Rear View

POWER 1 2 3 4 RELAY DC OUTPUT + - 12V 7:12W 1/O 2 1 GND 3 1 GND 5 G 6 7 8 SERIAL RS-232/422/485 2 Tx Rx GND RTS CTS Serial RS-232 1 Tx Rx GND LAN 10 1 100kW TA, 33.60 Hz

VK1200 Rear View

1 2 3 4 5 106 7 8 11 9

VK2100A Rear View

9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10

VK2200 Rear View

9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 10

No.	Component Description
1	power socket Plugs in the power cord from an AC power source.
2	power switch Powers the unit on or off.
3 12	V DC output ports	1 / 4 DC output port(s) providing a total output of 12 V DC, 1 / 2 A from the Control Box.
4	relay channels 4 / 8 channels; normally open, isolated relays with a contact rating of 24 V DC, 2 A max.
5 I/O	channels 2 / 4 / 8 channels that can be configured as digital inputs or outputs, with the first pin being ground and the rest being number pins.◆ Digital Input:◆ VDC Mode: 0 - 24 V DC; programmable range of 1 - 24 V DC◆ Dry Contact Mode: Pull-up 2k Ω to +12 V DC◆ Digital Output: 300 mA sink from 24 V DC
6 IR	/ serial ports 2 / 4 / 8 IR ports that can also be configured as RS-232 TX ports. pin 1: Signal / pin 2: Ground.
7 RS	-232/422/485 serial ports	1 / 2 5-pin RS-232/422/485 serial ports by pin assignment.
8 RS	-232 serial ports	1 / 4 / 6 3-pin RS-232 serial ports with Tx, Rx and GND.
9 grounding terminal		Connects to the grounding wire.
10 LAN		◆ Connects the unit to the corporate LAN for remote access and centralized management by ATEN Unizon.◆ Default network settings when no dynamic IP address is assigned by a DHCP server, after 30 seconds:VK2200 / VK1200◆ IP: 192.168.1.60◆ mask: 255.255.255.0VK2100A / VK1100A◆ IP: 192.168.0.60◆ mask: 255.255.255.0
11		Control LANConnects the unit to a secure subnetwork, separate from the corporate LAN, for managing IP devices and configuration by the ATEN Configurator VK6000, as well as for remote control by ATEN Keypads, Touch Panel or the ATEN Control System app on mobile devices.Default network settings when no dynamic IP address is assigned by a DHCP server, after 30 seconds:IP: 192.168.0.60mask: 255.255.255.0Supports DHCP server

Placement

Desktop

To place the control box on a flat surface, such as a desk, simply attach the foot pad set provided onto its 4 corners and place it on the surface.

Rack Mounting

■ VK2100A / VK2200

1. The VK2100A / VK2200 can be mounted onto a 19" (1U) system rack. The following diagrams are exemplified using VK2100. Using the rack mount kit, attach the 2 mounting brackets onto the sides of the unit with the 6 screws included.

Technical line drawing of a rectangular electronic device with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

1. Align the mounting brackets' screw holes with that of the front of the rack, and use 4 self-supplied screws to secure the unit onto the rack.

Isometric line drawing of a structural support frame with vertical supports and a central beam (no text or symbols)

■ VK1100A / VK1200

Optionally purchase an ATEN Rack Mount Kit to install VK1100A / VK1200 onto a a 19" (1U) system rack. Users can select the 2X-049G or 2X-021G rack mount kit for single or dual rack mount, respectively.

Single Rack Mount (2X-049G)

1. Using the rack mount kit, attach the 2 mounting brackets onto the sides of the unit with the 4 screws (M3x6) included.

Technical line drawing of a device chassis with mounting flanges and internal components (no text or symbols)

1. Align the mounting brackets' screw holes with that of the front of the rack, and secure the unit onto the rack using 2 self-supplied screws.

Isometric line drawing of a server rack with vertical supports and mounting points (no text or symbols)

Double Rack Mount (2X-021G)

1. Remove 2 screws at the bottom and 1 screw at the side from each of the two VK1100A / VK1200 units, as shown below.

Technical line drawing of two electronic device enclosures with mounting holes and control panels (no text or symbols)

1. Use 4 of the screws from step 2 to secure the two VK1100A / VK1200 units together with the link bracket. Then install the left and right mounting brackets onto the sides of the units using 2 of the M3x5 and M3x6 screws included.

Technical line drawing of a device chassis with labeled components (no text or symbols present)

1. Align the mounting brackets' screw holes with that of the front of the rack, and secure the units onto the rack using 4 self-supplied screw.

Isometric line drawing of a server rack with two vertical racks and a central rack unit (no text or symbols)

■ VK1100

Optionally purchase an ATEN Rack Mount Kit (2X-031G) to install VK1100 onto a 19" (1U) system rack.

1. Remove the 2 screws from the bottom and 1 screw from each side of the unit.

Isometric line drawing of a rectangular electronic device with ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

1. Using the 2 bottom screws from step 1 and 2 M3x6 screws from the rack mount kit, secure the mounting brackets to the sides of the VK1100.

M3X6 Hexagon Screw

1. Use 4 self-supplied screw to secure the mounting brackets onto the rack.

Isometric line drawing of a structural frame assembly with vertical supports and a central support block (no text or symbols)

Control Box Connections

To set up each device, refer to the installation diagrams on the pages that follows (each step provides a corresponding page with diagram), and do the following:

1. Use a grounding wire to ground the unit by connecting one end to the grounding terminal and the other end to a suitable grounded object.

Note: Do not omit this step. Proper grounding helps prevent damage to the unit from surges or static electricity.

1. Plug the power cord into the Control Box's power socket, and connect it to an AC power source.
2. Use a Cat 5e/6 cable to connect the VK1100A / VK2100A's LAN (Ethernet) port or VK1200 / VK2200's Control LAN port to a secured subnetwork.
3. (Optional) For VK1200 / VK2200, use another Cat 5e/6 cable to connect its LAN port to the corporate network.
4. Use the DC output terminals to wire 12 V DC power connections using the instructions on page 30.
5. Use the relay terminals to wire relay device connections using the instructions on page 32.
6. Use the IR / serial (RS-232 TX) terminals to wire IR or serial device connections using the instructions on page 35.
7. Use the digital I/O terminals to wire digital input / output device connections using the instructions on page 37.
8. Use the 3-pin RS-232 terminals to wire RS-232 serial device connections using the instructions on page 39.

9. Use the 5-pin RS-232/422/485 terminals to wire the corresponding serial device connections using the instructions on page 41.

10. Connect IP-based devices to the same network as the Control Box. Refer to Ethernet / Control LAN, page 42 for details.

Note:

• For KNX-compliant devices, connect the devices to a KNX IP interface, and then connect the KNX IP interface to the network where the Control Box is installed.

• To check if the KNX functions are supported by the Control Box, see Specifications, page 325.

• Start the unit by switching on its power switch.

• For VK1200 / VK2200, use the LCD panel to set its ID.

VK1100A Installation Diagram

graph TD
    A["Projector LiftCurtain Screen"] --> B["Relay"]
    C["Air Conditioning"] --> D["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"]
    E["Lighting Control"] --> D
    F["Video Matrix Switch"] --> D
    G["Power Distribution Unit"] --> D
    H["Power Cord"] --> I["Power"]
    J["Terminal Block"] --> K["DI / DO"]
    L["Sensor"] --> M["IR / RS-232"]
    N["Door Sensor"] --> M
    O["Audio Mixer"] --> P["Ethernet"]
    Q["Conferencing"] --> P
    R["Rear View"] --> S["Ground"]
    T["6"] --> U["Relay"]
    V["10"] --> W["Relay"]
    X["9"] --> Y["Relay"]
    Z["1"] --> AA["Power"]
    AB["2"] --> AC["Power"]
    AD["5"] --> AE["Power"]
    AF["8"] --> AG["Power"]
    AH["7"] --> AI["Power"]
    AJ["3"] --> AK["Power"]

VK1200 Installation Diagram

graph TD
    A["Power"] --> B["Power cord"]
    C["Terminal Block Sensor"] --> D["DI / DO Ethernet"]
    E["TV Blu-ray Player Amplifier Video"] --> F["IR / RS-232"]
    G["Audio MixerDoor SensorOccupancy Conferencing"] --> H["Ethernet"]
    I["Power Distribution Unit"] --> J["Relay"]
    K["Projector Lift Curtain Screen"] --> L["Relay"]
    M["Air Conditioning"] --> N["Relay"]
    O["Lighting Control Project"] --> P["Relay"]
    Q["Video Matrix Switch"] --> R["Relay"]
    S["Power"] --> T["Rear View"]
    U["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"] --> V["Relay"]
    W["RS-232"] --> X["Relay"]
    Y["Power"] --> Z["Power"]
    AA["Power"] --> AB["Power"]
    AC["Power"] --> AD["Power"]
    AE["Power"] --> AF["Power"]
    AG["Power"] --> AH["Power"]

VK2100A Installation Diagram

graph TD
    A["1 Power cord"] --> B["2 Terminal Block"]
    B --> C["3 Power Distribution Unit"]
    D["4 Sensor"] --> E["5 DI / DO"]
    E --> F["6 Relay"]
    G["7 Body-ray Player Amplifier"] --> H["8 IR / RS-232"]
    H --> I["9 RS-232"]
    J["10 Video Matrix Switch"] --> K["11 Lighting Control Project"]
    K --> L["12 Power Distribution Unit"]
    M["13 Audio Mixer"] --> N["14 Video Conferencing"]
    O["15 Di / DO"] --> P["16 Power Power"]
    Q["17 DI / DO"] --> R["18 IR / RS-232"]
    S["19 RS-232"] --> T["20 Power Distribution Unit"]

VK2200 Installation Diagram

graph TD
    A["Power Power"] --> B["Power cord"]
    A --> C["Terminal Block"]
    D["Relay"] --> E["Curtain"]
    D --> F["Lift"]
    D --> G["Projector Screen"]
    H["RS-232 / RS-422 / RS-485"] --> I["Air Conditioning"]
    H --> J["RS-232"]
    K["ATEN UnizonProjector"] --> L["Power Distribution Unit"]
    K --> M["Ethernet"]
    N["DI / DO"] --> O["Sensor"]
    N --> P["Door Sensor"]
    N --> Q["Oscution"]
    N --> R["Blu-ray Player"]
    N --> S["Amplifier"]
    T["IR / RS-232"] --> U["Sensor"]
    T --> V["Door Sensor"]
    T --> W["Oscution"]
    T --> X["Blu-ray Player"]
    T --> Y["Amplifier"]
    Z["Ethernet"] --> AA["Audio Mixer"]
    Z --> AB["Video Conferencing"]

12 V DC Power Output

ATEN Control Box offers the following 12 V DC outputs for providing power to hardware devices:

12V DC Power Output VK1100A / VK1200 VK2100A / VK2200
Number of Channels 1	4
Max. Power Supply DC	12 V, 1 A DC 12 V, 2 A

The outputs can power one or four independent hardware devices, one or four loops for connected relay devices, or one or four digital output devices.

If the combined current of the ports exceeds 1 A (VK1100A / VK1200) or 2 A (VK2100A / VK2200), the DC power overload LED lights orange, an alarm beeps three times, and the ports are turned off. To return power to the ports, power off the Control Box, unplug all hardware connected to the 12 V DC output ports, power on the Control Box, and then plug in the hardware devices, one at a time, and make sure the current does not exceed 1 A or 2 A.

The diagrams on the next three pages show ports on the VK2100A / VK2200. The VK1100A / VK1200 is the same except that it has fewer 12 V DC terminal blocks.

Independent Power Supply

12 V DC Output Ports Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A/2 A Max DC OUTPUT:12V==24W TOTAL 3 + - + - 4 1 + - + - 2 Connects to Provides 12 V DC power to independent hardware devices.

Digital Output Power Supply

12 V DC Output Ports

graph TD
    A["Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max"] --> B["DC"]
    B --> C["Output: 12V DC = 24W TOTAL"]
    B --> D["I/O"]
    B --> E["GND"]
    B --> F["Connects to Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting and Equipment Control"]
    B --> G["Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop"]

Digital Output Dual Power Supply (VK2100A/ VK2200 only)

12 V DC Output Ports

Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max DC OUTPUT:12V === 24W TOTAL 3 + - + - 4 1 + - + - 2 I/O 1 2 3 4 GND

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["2"]
    B --> C["Provides connection to digital output #1."]
    C --> D["Provides connection to digital output #2."]
    D --> E["Provides 12 V DC power for the digital output loop."]
    E --> F["1"]
    E --> G["2"]
    F --> H["GND"]

Relay

ATEN Control Box provides the following isolated relays:

Relay VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A VK2200
Number of Channels 4	8
Contact Rating 24 V DC, 2 A
Default Status Normally Open

Using Self-supplied Power

- All are normally open, isolated relays.

- Contact Rating: 24 V DC 2 A Max

Normally Open Closed

Connects to room control equipment

- For example, you may connect the relay channels to external relays, or devices equipped with relay channels, such as switch, screen, projector lift, lighting, motorized equipment, motion device, etc.

- Do no exceed a total of 24V DC, 2A for each channel.

Relay Power Supply

graph TD
    A["12 V DC Output Ports"] --> B["DC"]
    A --> C["RELAY"]
    B --> D["INPUT: 24V = MAXIMUM"]
    C --> E["INPUT: 24V = MAXIMUM"]
    D --> F["Provides 12 V DC power for the relay loop."]
    E --> G["Connects to room control equipment"]
    H["Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A / 2 A Max"] --> A
    I["For example, you may connect the relay channels to external relays, or devices equipped with relay channels, such as switch, screen, projector lift, lighting, motorized equipment, motion device, etc."] --> G
    J["Do no exceed a total of 24V DC, 2A for each channel."] --> G

Application: Control Using External Relays

To install external relays, refer to the illustration below where two external relays are used to control a projector screen.

graph TD
    A["ATEN Controller"] -->|DC/1 2 4| B["Projector Screen"]
    A -->|RELAY 1| C["Relay 1"]
    A -->|RELAY 2| D["Relay 2"]
    B -->|Upward movement| E["AC Power"]
    B -->|Downward movement| E
    C -->|1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 V| F["Output: 12V = 24W TOTAL"]
    D -->|1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 V| F

Relay Pins Definition Normally Closed Normally Open Common 12V

IR / Serial

ATEN Control Box provides the following IR / serial (RS-232) ports:

IR / Serial		VK1100AVK1200	VK2100A VK2200
2-Pin IR/Serial 2		4	8
IR	Carrier Frequency	10 ~ 455 kHz
	Default Level Low
Serial (RS-232)	Baud rate	300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)
	Data bit	7, 8 (default)
	Stop bit	1 (default), 2
	Parity None (default), Even, Odd
	Signal Level TTL	(0 ~ 5 V DC) TTL (0 ~ 5 V DC)

graph TD
    A["IR/SERIAL 1 S G S G 2"] --> B["TTL Level (0 ~ 5 V)<br>Carrier Frequency: 10 ~ 455 kHz"]
    C["IR"] --> D["RS-232 Ports"]
    D --> E["Unidirectional (0 ~ 5 V<br>or +/-5 V)<br>Baud Rate: 300 to 115200<br>(default: 9600)<br>Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7<br>Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2<br>Parity: None (default), Even or Odd"]
    F["Connects to"] --> G["IR: Blu-ray / DVD Player, TV,<br>Audio Receiver, Projector, etc."]
    F --> H["RS-232: Camera, Projector,<br>Switch, Audio Mixer, Multimedia<br>Device, etc."]

By default, the unidirectional IR / serial channels are set to transmit IR signals.

IR Connection: Connect a transmitter cable to a set of IR and ground terminals of the Control Box, and install the IR transmitter on or near the IR device's IR receiving port, as shown on page 36.

Serial Connection: Connect a serial device's receiver (RX) and ground terminals to a set of serial (TX) and ground terminals of the Control Box. Then configure the same serial port settings on both the Control Box and the connecting serial device, allowing them to communicate.

One IR Transmitter

IR/SERIAL 3 4 1 2 IR Receptor

Two IR Transmitters

graph TD
    A["IR/SERIAL 1-4"] --> B["Unidirectional IR"]
    C["TV Power Supply"] --> D["2 x IR Transmitters"]
    B --> D
    D --> E["Computer"]

Digital I/O

The VK1100A / VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 provides the following digital input / output channels:

Digital I/O		VK1100A / VK1200	VK2100A	VK2200
Number of Channels 2		4	8
Digital Input	VDC Mode	Voltage range: 0 ~ 24 V DCProgrammable range: 1 ~ 24 V DC
	Dry Contact Mode	Pull-up: 2 kΩ to +12 V DC
Digital Output		Normally Open300 mA sink from 24 V DC

Digital Input (Dry Contact):

Connects to digital I/O devices with an input loop — open or closed — for providing indicators from sensors or switches of an event, which can be used by the Control Box to trigger events and/or functions.

Digital Input (VDC Mode):

Connects to DC devices (temperature, current and monitor sensors) for providing voltage signals (1 to 24 V) to the ATEN Control Box, to trigger certain events and/or functions when the voltage signals are above or below the defined threshold.

graph TD
    A["Programmable Digital Input Channels"] --> B["I/O"]
    B --> C["Connects to: Digital Input: Switches, Sensors Monitors and Button Triggers."]
    B --> D["Digital Input VDC Mode: -Input Voltage Range: 0 ~ 24 V DC, -Programmable Range: 1 ~ 24 VDC"]
    B --> E["Dry Contact Mode: -Pull-up 2 kΩ to + 12 V DC"]

Digital Output:

Provides non-powered dry contact (open and closed) circuit control of hardware devices, such as electric screens, projector lifts and other motorized equipment, which must be connected using a relay module, as shown below.

graph TD
    A["Programmable Digital Output Channels"] --> B["I/O"]
    B --> C["1 2 3 4 GND"]
    C --> D["Connects to: Digital Output: Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting and Equipment Control."]
    D --> E["Relay Module"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

RS-232 (3-Pin)

VK1200 / VK2100A / VK2200 provides the following 3-pin RS-232 ports:

RS-232 (3-pin) VK1	100A / VK1200 VK2100	A VK2200
Number of Channels 1	4	6
Baud rate 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)
Data bit 7, 8 (default)
Stop bit 1 (default), 2
Parity None (default), Even, Odd

Connect to devices for controlling and receiving status messages from them. For bidirectional RS-232 control, the transmit (TX), receive (RX) and ground (GND) terminals must be wired on both the ATEN Control System and the device connecting.

graph TD
    A["SERIAL RS-232"] --> B["Bidirectional RS-232 Ports"]
    A --> C["Connects to"]
    A --> D["Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)"]
    A --> E["Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7"]
    A --> F["Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2"]
    A --> G["Parity: None (default), even or odd"]
    A --> H["Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (DB-9)

These two or four (VK1100 / VK2100) bidirectional ports provide serial control of hardware devices (projectors, switches, etc.) with programmable pin assignments and receive status messages from the connected devices. The diagram below shows ports on the VK2100. The VK1100 is the same except that it has fewer ports.

graph TD
    A["SERIAL RS-232/422/485"] --> B["Programmable Bidirectional RS-232/422/485 Ports"]
    B --> C["Configurable by pin assignment"]
    C --> D["Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)"]
    C --> E["Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7"]
    C --> F["Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2"]
    C --> G["Parity: None (default), Even or Odd"]
    C --> H["Flow Control: None (default) or RTS/CTS"]
    A --> I["Connects to"]
    I --> J["Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]

Pin Assignments

RS-232 RS-422 RS-485
pin 2: RX pin 1:	RX- pin 3: D+
pin 3: TX pin 2:	RX+ pin 4: D-
pin 5: GND pin 3:	TX+	pin 5: GND*Note:A ground terminal connection is recommended but not required.
pin 7: RTS pin 4:	TX-
pin 8: CTS pin 5:	GND

RS-232 / 422 / 485 (5-Pin)

The ATEN Control System provides the following RS-232/422/485 ports:

	VK1100A / VK1200 VK2100A / VK2200
Number of Channels 1	2
Baud rate 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)
Data bit 7, 8 (default)
Stop bit 1 (default), 2
Parity None (default), Even, Odd

Connect to devices, configurable by pin assignments, for controlling and receiving status messages from them.

Bidirectional RS-232 / 422 / 485 Ports Configurable by pin assignment SERIAL RS-232 / 422 / 485 PIN ASSIGNMENT Tx Rx GND RTS CTS RS-232 Tx+ Tx- GND Rx+ Rx- RS-422 D+ D- RS-485 Connects to Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc.

Ethernet / Control LAN

The Ethernet / Control LAN port provides an Ethernet connection for controlling up to 25 (VK1100A / VK2100A) or 64 (VK1200 / VK2200) LAN devices and/or remote control by ATEN Keypads, Touch Panel, and the ATEN Control System app on a mobile device in a network.

graph TD
    A["Ethernet / Control LAN"] --> B["Ethernet Switch"]
    B --> C["ATEN"]
    C --> D["KNX IP Interface"]
    D --> E["Lighting"]
    D --> F["HVAC Systems"]
    G["The RJ-45 port is used to connect and access TCP, UDP, PJLink, ONVIF, HTTP, HTTPS, and Telnet devices. VK1200 / 2200 can operate as a DHCP server for assigning IP addresses to the devices"] --> H["ONVIF"]
    H --> I["TCP"]
    I --> J["PJLink"]
    J --> K["Telnet"]
    K --> L["Modular Matrix Switch"]
    L --> M["Telnet"]
    M --> N["eco PDU"]
    N --> O["UDP"]
    O --> P["HTTP HTTPS"]
    P --> Q["Video Conferencing System"]

Panel Components

VK0100

VK0200

No.	Component Description
1	buttons and button LEDs	Indicate the status of the Control Pad and if the function on each button, e.g. lighting or projector, is on or off. For detailed information about device/function status under different LED activities, seeLED Indications, page 45.
2	system LEDs Contains a	LAN and a link LED to indicate network connection and data transmission status:♦ LAN LED lights green to indicate that the Control Pad is connected to network.♦ Link LED lights green to indicate that the Control Pad is actively transmitting and receiving data.
3	reset button	♦ To clear all the configurations except the network settings, press and hold the reset button for 8 seconds.♦ To reset the network settings, press the reset button once.
4	RS-232 serial ports Connect up to two RS-232 serial devices.
5	relay channels Connect up to two relay devices. Relay contacts are normally open, isolated with a contact rating of 24 V DC, 1 A max.
6	digital input Port Connect to one digital input device that supports programmable input (1 ~ 5 V DC) or dry contact (pull-up 2k ohms to 5 V DC).
7	Ethernet port Connects to an Ethernet cable to provide power and access to the network.
8	control pad ID switch Sets an ID for the Control Pad.
9	DC power port Connects to a 5 V DC power adapter.

LED Indications

Refer to the table below for the status descriptions of a Control Pad indicated by button LEDs.

Button LED Status	LED Activity Control	Pad Status
a button LED lights	orange The Control Pad	is powered on and the button is currently off.
a button LED lights	white The Control Pad	is powered on and the button is currently on.
a button LED blinks	orange and white repeatedly	The function assigned to the button is being executed.
all button LEDs blink	orange and white once	The Control Pad is restoring its default settings.
all button LEDs blink	orange and white repeatedly	The firmware of the Control Pad is being upgraded.

Installing the Control Pads

1. Prepare the installation site.

a) Choose a location where cables are free of interference. You can install the Control Pad on walls, desks, and podiums.
b) Prepare a recession on the chosen location to accommodate the Control Pad. You can install the Control Pad directly on the chosen location or through a wall box. For recommended cutout dimensions, see CAD and Panel Cutout Diagrams, page 348.

1. Connect the Control Pad to various devices, for integration and control, refer to the corresponding interface for the wiring information of each:

♦ Wiring Information, page 51
♦ Relay Connections, page 52
♦ Digital Input Device, page 53

Note: To expand connection ports on the Control Pad, install ATEN Expansion Boxes.

1. To use PoE, connect the Control Pad to a PoE switch via an Ethernet cable. For details, see Ethernet, page 54.

Note: If you do not have a power sourcing equipment for PoE, contact your local sales representative to purchase a power adapter and then follow the steps below to prepare the power cord.

1 +5V GND 5mm 2 3 +5V GND (+) (-)

(1) Cut the connector end of the power adapter.
(2) Strip 5 mm(0.5 cm) off the insulation cover of the power adapter cable to expose the +5V wire and the grounding wire.
(3) Insert the expose +5V wire and the grounding wire tightly into the provided 2-pin terminal block connector. Use a voltmeter to determine the polarity of an exposed wire.

VK0100

RS-232 Projector Video Switch Relay Lighting Control Screen Projector Lift DI Dry Contact Device Door Sensor PoE Switch Network Ethernet Cable Projector Conference System Camera

VK0200

graph TD
    A["Projector Lift"] --> B["Screen"]
    B --> C["Lighting Control"]
    C --> D["Relay"]
    D --> E["Projector Video Switch"]
    E --> F["DI"]
    F --> G["Dry Contact Device"]
    F --> H["Door Sensor"]
    I["PoE Switch"] --> J["Network"]
    K["Ethernet Cable"] --> L["Conference System"]
    M["Camera"] --> N["Projector"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

1. Use the ID Switch to assign an ID to the Control Pad.

Note: It is possible to install more than 16 controllers under the same subnet. In which case, the 17th controller and the ones added after that will each be sharing its ID with another controller. If you have any ATEN Expansion Box and/or Keypad connected to controllers using shared IDs, reconfigure the connection mode. For details, see Controller Properties, page 116.

1. Power on all the devices. The button LEDs light orange.
2. Assemble the button caps onto the Control Pad.

a) Assemble button caps of the same row with each other. Put the button with two latches to the far right.

b) From the top row, attach each row of button caps to the Control Pad by pressing on the latches.

Diagram of a rectangular device with internal circuit layout and red arrows indicating direction or flow, featuring two circled regions.

Caution: When removing button caps, place your fingers on the top of button caps and then press downwards, as illustrated below. Pressing upwards from the bottom may cause damages to the button caps.

Diagram of a rectangular electrical or mechanical component with internal grid structure and red arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

1. Mount the Control Pad to the chosen location with or without a wall box.

a) Secure the Control Pad to the chosen location with self-prepared screws.

b) Install the supplied faceplate to the Control Pad.

VK0100

Exploded view diagram of a device showing internal components and assembly (no text or labels)

VK0200 (for EU type)

graph TD
    A["Display Panel"] --> B["Module 1"]
    B --> C["Module 2"]
    C --> D["Module 3"]
    D --> E["Package Module"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#bbf,stroke:#333

VK0200 (for MK type)

Diagram showing a device assembly with labeled components including a front panel, internal circuit board, and housing (no text or symbols present)

Wiring Information

RS-232 Serial Connection

The two bidirectional RS-232 ports on the Control Pad provide serial control of hardware devices (projectors, matrix switches, etc.) and receive status messages from the connected devices. For bidirectional RS-232 control, the transmit, receive, and ground pins must be wired on both the Control Pad and hardware device. Each hardware device requires different wiring. Please consult each hardware device's manual for details.

graph TD
    A["Bidirectional RS-232 Ports"] --> B["Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)"]
    A --> C["Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7"]
    A --> D["Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2"]
    A --> E["Parity: None (default), even or odd"]
    A --> F["Serial RS-232"]
    F --> G["1 TX RX GND"]
    F --> H["2 TX RX GND"]
    F --> I["3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15/16/17/18/19/20/21/22/23/24/25/26/27/28/29/30/31/32/33/34/35/36/37/38/39/40/41/42/43/44/45/46/47/48/49/50/51/52/53/54/55/56/57/58/59/60/61/62/63/64/65/66/67/68/69/70/71/72/73/74/75/76/77/78/79/80/81/82/83/84/85/86/87/88/89/90/91/92/93/94/95/96/97/98/99"]
    F --> G
    G --> H
    H --> I
    I --> J["Connects to Projector, Matrix Switch, Camera, etc."]

Relay Connections

These 2 relay channels provide connections to control hardware devices such as electric screens, projector lifts and other motorized equipment. Each relay is normally open by default.

2 x Relay Channels

INPUT:24V = MAXIMUM RELAY Normally Open, Isolated Relays Contact Rating: 24VDC 1A Max Connects to Switch, Screen, Projector Lift, Lighting, Motorized Equipment, Motion Device, etc.

Digital Input Device

The digital input port on the Control Pad can be used to install a digital input device such as a switch or a sensor. The digital input channel can be configured to the VDC mode or the Dry Contact mode.

graph TD
    A["I/O 1 GND"] --> B["Connects to Digital Input: Switches, Sensors, Monitors, or Button"]
    C["Digital Input VDC Mode: -Input Voltage Range: 0 to 5 VDC\n-Programmable Range: 1 to 5 VDC"] --> D["Connects to Digital Input: Switches, Sensors, Monitors, or Button"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

Digital Input (Dry Contact):

Digital inputs are hardware devices (switches, sensors, monitors) with two circuit signals – open and closed. These two signals provide indicators from sensors or switches of an event. An event can be the on/off power, dry contact, sensor or switch status from a device. This information is used to trigger events and functions through the Control Pad.

Digital Input (VDC):

Digital input 5VDC hardware devices (temperature, current and monitor sensors) provide voltage signals between 1 and 5. A digital input port detects if a voltage is above/below a specific threshold (1 to 5). If the voltage coming from a hardware device is higher than the set value, the Control Pad will detect the digital input as high. If the voltage coming from a hardware device is lower than the set value, the Control Pad will detect the digital input as low. This information is used to trigger events and functions through the Control Pad.

Ethernet

The RJ-45 port provides an Ethernet connection for accessing the web console (page 79), controlling up to 8 IP devices, and remote control by the Control System app within the same subnetwork.

graph TD
    A["Ethernet"] --> B["Ethernet Switch"]
    B --> C["KNX IP Interface"]
    C --> D["Lighting"]
    C --> E["HVAC Systems"]
    F["The RJ-45 port is used to connect and access TCP, UDP, PJLink, ONVIF, HTTP, HTTPS, and Telnet devices."] --> G["ONVIF"]
    G --> H["TCP"]
    G --> I["PJLink"]
    G --> J["Telnet"]
    G --> K["Modular Matrix Switch"]
    G --> L["Telnet"]
    L --> M["eco PDU"]
    L --> N["UDP"]
    L --> O["HTTP HTTPS"]
    L --> P["Video Conferencing System"]
    B --> Q["ATEN"]
    Q --> R["Expansion Box"]

ATEN Expansion Box

ATEN Expansion Boxes (sold separately) provide additional ports for a flexible expansion of the ATEN Control System. This allows you to add and control additional devices in an environment when more devices are required. With the advantage of an Ethernet-based connection, the expansion boxes are easily connected to the ATEN controller via a LAN connection from a variety of locations across a network. The diagram below provides a setup example using the VK224, a 4-Port Serial Expansion Box.

graph TD
    A["Control Box"] --> B["VK224 (Rear)"]
    B --> C["Controller ID"]
    B --> D["Expander ID"]
    B --> E["RS-232/422/485"]
    B --> F["LAN"]
    B --> G["3"]
    B --> H["4"]
    B --> I["Network"]
    I --> J["Power Distribution Unit"]
    I --> K["Video Matrix Projector Camera"]
    I --> L["Serial Devices"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

Note:

• To add and configure ATEN Expansion Boxes, see Left Sidebar, page 110 and Expansion Box (Expander), page 117.
  ◆ The available Expansion Box models include:

Model Description

VK224 4-Port Serial Expansion

VK236 6-Port IR/Serial Expansion Box

VK248 8-Channel Relay Expansion Box

VK258 8-Channel Digital I/O Expansion Box

Control Interface Devices

ATEN Keypad

The ATEN Keypad mounts to a wall to provide control of hardware through a controller. The setup of the Keypad to the Control System can be illustrated as follows:

ATEN Keypad Powered by PoE or DC 5V Ethernet Switch Screen BD-Player VK1100 (Rear) ProjectorLight Video Switch

Note:

◆ The following Keypad models are available:

Model Description

VK108US 8-Button Keypad (US, 1 Gang)

VK112EU 12-Button Keypad (EU, 2 Gang)

- To have your Keypad buttons customized with text engraving, visit this page to make your order:

https://www.aten.com/ext_data/global_en/VK_Keypad_Engraving_Service/aten_keypad.html

Hardware Overview VK108US

VK112EU

No. Component Description

1 buttons VK108US		The Keypad can be customized up to 14 different layouts using 4 to 8 buttons.
		VK112EUThe Keypad can be customized up to 12 different layouts using 6 to 12 buttons.
2 button LEDs Indicate function and Keypad statuses. For detailed information, seeLED Indications, page 59.
3	s y s t e indicators	m LAN: lights green to indicate that the Keypad is connected to LAN.Link: lights green to indicate that the Keypad is connected to the assigned controller.
4 reset pushbutton Press to reset the Keypad to its default network settings.
5 DC power Plug a power adapter into this DC power input.
6 keypad ID switch Sets an ID to the Keypad (1~8).

No.	Component Description
7	controller ID switch	Sets the ID of the controller (1 ~ 16) to which the Keypad connects.
8	L A N p	◆ Connects the Keypad to LAN◆ Supplies power (PoE) if a power sourcing equipment is installed.

LED Indications

Refer to the table below for the status descriptions of a Keypad indicated by button LEDs.

Keypad Button LED Activity Keypad Status
a button LED lights or	orange The Keypad is p	powered on and the button is currently off.
	lights white The Keypad	ad is powered on and the button is currently on.
	blinks orange and white repeatedly	The function assigned to the button is being executed.
all button LEDs	blink orange and white repeatedly	The firmware of the Control Pad is being upgraded.
	blink orange The Keypad is disconnected from the Control Box.

Layout Examples

VK108US

VK112EU

Diagram of a 3x3 grid layout with no text or symbols, labeled 'ΔTEN' at bottom (no readable text or symbols within the grid)

ATEN

ATEN

ATEN

Diagram of a 3x4 grid layout with labeled boxes and 'ATEN' text at bottom (no other symbols or text)

Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

Diagram of a device panel with multiple compartments and control buttons, labeled 'ATEN' at bottom (no readable text or symbols beyond label)

ATEN

Diagram of a grid layout with control buttons, no text or symbols present

ATEN

ATEN

Diagram of a device layout with six rectangular compartments and labeled 'ATEN' at the bottom (no text or symbols within the diagram itself)

Installing ATEN Keypad

1. Prepare the installation site.

a) Choose a location where cables are free of interference. You can install the keypad on walls, desks, and podiums.
b) Prepare a recession on the chosen location to accommodate the keypad. You can install the keypad directly on the chosen location or through a wall box. For recommended cutout dimensions, see CAD and Panel Cutout Diagrams, page 348.

1. Use the keypad ID switch to set an ID for the unit, and set the controller ID switch to the ID of the controller to which you wish to connect.

Note: One ATEN Control Box/ Control Pad can work with up to 8 Keypads.

1. Supply power and network connectivity to the keypad. Do one of the following:

◆ Use an Ethernet cable to connect the keypad to a PoE switch.
If you do not have a power sourcing equipment, use an Ethernet cable to connect the keypad to LAN and a power adapter to supply power. Follow the steps below to install a terminal block to the power adapter.

① +5V GND 5mm ② ③ +5V GND (+) (-)

(1) Cut the connector end of the power adapter.
(2) Strip 5 mm(0.5 cm) off the insulation cover of the power adapter cable to expose the +5V wire and the grounding wire.
(3) Insert the expose +5V wire and the grounding wire tightly into the provided 2-pin terminal block connector. Use a voltmeter to determine the polarity of an exposed wire.

The LAN LED light green to indicate that the Keypad is supplied with power and successfully linked to the network.

Note:

• Make sure to install the Keypad to the same subnet with its assigned controller.

• The Keypad adopts the default IP address 192.168.0.60 if the network switch does not support DHCP. To configure the IP address, log in the web interface using the default IP address and the default password (password).

• Secure the Keypad to the chosen surface and install the button caps and faceplate.

a) Secure the Keypad to the chosen surface using two screws.

VK108US

Exploded view diagram of a battery pack assembly showing internal components and connection to a housing (no text or labels)

VK112EU

Diagram of a device assembly showing components from a front panel to an internal grid, with no visible text or symbols.

VK112MK

Technical diagram showing assembly of a device into a housing, with labeled components and dashed lines indicating connection or assembly.

b) Follow the layout created in the Viewer and assemble the button caps onto the Keypad.

- Assemble button caps of the same row with each other. Put the button with two latches to the far right.

- From the top row, attach each row of button caps to the Keypad by pressing on the latches.

Diagram of a traditional Chinese abacus with red circles highlighting specific regions and a downward arrow indicating direction.

Caution: When removing button caps, place your fingers on the top of button caps and then press downwards, as illustrated below. Pressing upwards from the bottom may cause damages to the button caps.

Pure electrical circuit lines without any symbols

1. Attach the faceplate to the Keypad.

IMPORTANT: After installing the Keypad, create a control interface (Viewer) and upload the Viewer to the controller. For details, see Design, page 100.

ATEN 8" Touch Panel (VK320)

Hardware Overview

No.	Component Description
1	microphones Receive audio input.
2	restart button Pin this button to restart the device.
3	set button Pin this button to open the system settings page.
4	USB-C slot Receives a USB-C cable for firmware upgrades and app updates.
5	LED light bars Lights up when the touch panel is receiving power.
6	speakers Play beep sounds to indicate control actions.
7	plate screw Holds the touch panel to the wall plate.
8	power port Receives a power jack.
9	Ethernet port Receives an Ethernet cable which supplies network connectivity. It can also receive power if connected to a power sender (PSE), such as a PoE switch.

Mounting the VK320 Touch Panel

Wall Mount

1. (Optional) To use a junction box, cut out a space in the chosen surface to accommodate the junction box.
2. Loosen the plate screw and remove the wall plate from the touch panel.
3. Connect the device to power through PoE or DC power.

PoE

(a) Connect the supplied 90^ RJ-45 cable adapter to an Ethernet cable (that is connected to a PoE switch), and then thread the other end of the cable through the junction box and the wall plate.

Important: Install the wall plate with the screw hole facing outward. For a portrait view of the touch panel, keep the screw hole at the bottom (as illustrated); for a landscape view, install the plate with the screw hole on the right.

(b) Secure the wall plate to the junction box using the supplied screws.
(c) Plug the other end of the cable adapter to the PoE port of the touch panel.

- Terminal block

Follow the steps in Preparing the Power Cord to install the terminal block.

(a) Connect the power adapter to a power source, and then thread the other end of the cable through the junction box and the wall plate.

Important: Install the wall plate with the screw hole facing outward. For a portrait view of the touch panel, keep the screw hole at the bottom (as illustrated); for a landscape view, install the plate with the screw hole on the right.

(b) Secure the wall plate to the junction box using the supplied screws.

(c) Plug the terminal block to the power port of the touch panel.

1. Slide the touch panel onto the wall plate until it is locked in position, and then secure the touch panel with the screw that you removed at step 2. The LED light bars light green to indicate that the panel is receiving power.

Tabletop Mount using the VK102 Tabletop Kit

Optionally purchase a tabletop kit (VK102) for using the touch panel on a desktop. For a step-by-step install procedure, visit the VK102 product page and download VK102 Tabletop Kit Quick Start Guide.

Configuring Network Settings

1. Pin the set button once. The Settings page appears.
2. Tap Network & Internet.
3. Tap the listed settings to configure them as needed.

Changing the Interface Language

1. Pin the set button once. The Settings page appears.
2. Tap System > Languages & input.

Updating Control System App

To update the Control System app on your touch panel, follow the steps below.

Note: The Control System app can only be updated to a newer version.

1. Download the Control System app of your chosen version from the product page and save the file to a type-C USB flash drive.
2. Insert the USB flash drive to the USB Type-C port.

3. From the main page, tap . The system settings page appears.

4. Tap Storage > USB drive.

5. Locate and tap the app installer that downloaded. A confirmation message appears.

6. Tap Continue, and then Install to start the update. When the update is complete, a message appears.

Upgrading Firmware for ATEN Touch Panel

To upgrade the firmware of the touch panel to a newer version, follow the steps below.

Note: The firmware of the VK320 touch panel can only be upgraded to a newer version.

1. Download the firmware package from the VK320 product page.
2. Unzip the downloaded firmware package and save the file to the root directory of a USB flash drive (in FAT32), e.g. E:\
3. Insert the USB drive to the USB Type-C port of the touch panel. The touch panel automatically saves a copy of the firmware file to its system. When the copy is complete, a “transfer completed” message appears.
4. Pin the Set button on the unit, and then tap System > Advanced > System updates. The upgrade starts. When the firmware upgrade is complete, the touch panel reboots itself.
5. A message appears to prompt you to remove the firmware file from the touch panel. Tap Yes to complete the upgrade.

Note: Make sure to remove the firmware file to prevent another upgrade.

Other Configurations & Actions

◆ To access the settings page, pin the set button once.

Set button VK320

- To restart the device, pin the restart button once.

ATEN 10" Touch Panel (VK330)

Hardware Overview

Labeled diagram of a computer monitor showing internal components and rear panel views

No.	Component Description
1	touch screen Tap on the screen to operate the control system and/or configure the touch panel.
2	status LED Lights on when the touch panel is powered on.
3	function button Press the Function button to show the settings page.
4	brightness up / down Press to adjust the display brightness.
5	volume up / down Press to adjust the volume of the touch panel.
6	stereo audio out Connects to a stereo audio output.

No.	Component Description
7	screw holes for panel plate	Screw holes used to secure a panel plate to mount the touch panel on a wall.
8	speakers Plays beep sounds to indicate control actions.
9	contact pins Connect to an Access Inspector (VK401) to receive and transmit data.
10	power switch Turns the touch panel on or off.
11	power jack Receives a power cord.
12	reserved for debugging purpose	These ports are reserved for debugging.
13	USB Micro-B port Use this port to upgrade/downgrade the device firmware.
14	USB type-A port Use this port to update the ATEN Control System app installed in the Touch Panel. For details, see Updating Control System App, page 73.
15	LAN port with PoE Receives an Ethernet cable which supplies network connectivity. It can also receive power if connected to a power sender (PSE), such as a PoE switch.

Mounting the Touch Panel

The VK330 Touch Panel supports desk mount, wall mount, or any 3rd-party mounting accessory that is VESA compliant (75 x 75 mm). For more information about the mounting accessories, please visit the product web page.

Desk Mount

To mount the VK330 on a desk using ATEN desk mount accessory — VK304 — refer to the diagram below.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical device with projection lines and a screen (no text or symbols)

Wall Mount

To mount the VK330 onto a wall using ATEN wall mount accessory — VK302 — follow the steps and refer to the diagrams below.

1. Using the wall anchors and screws, secure the wall plate to the wall in the illustrated direction. Secure the panel plate to the VK330 using the M4 screws.

2. Slide the panel plate to the wall plate to secure the VK330 onto the wall.

Installing the Touch Panel

1. Using the 90° RJ-45 cable adapter (if provided for your package edition) and an Ethernet cable, connect the unit to a PoE switch or PoE injector to provide power and access to the network.

2. Put the power switch to ON. The status LED lights green and the Touch Panel starts loading and displays the Start page.

graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["SYSTEM"]
    B --> C["FOR"]
    C --> D["NO"]
    D --> E["DEMO"]
    style A fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style B fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style C fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style D fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff
    style E fill:#000,stroke:#fff,color:#fff

Operating the Touch Panel

Note: In highly humid environment, it is advised that you keep the touch panel powered on and in operation to prevent fogging inside the touch panel.

• To configure system settings of the Touch Panel, press the Function button on the device open the system settings page.
• To return to the ATEN Control System app from the settings page, tap Return to ATEN Control System App.
• For details on using the Control System app, see Demo/Start Screen, page 290.

Changing the Interface Language

1. Press the Function button.
2. Tap System > Languages & input > Languages > + Add a language.
3. Tap a preferred language. The selected option is added to the language list.
4. Tap and hold the language you just added to the top of the list. The Touch Panel uses the language that lists first.

Configuring the Network Settings

1. Press the Function button.
2. Tap Network & Internet > Ethernet > Ethernet IP Mode to configure the settings.

Updating Control System App

To update the Control System app on your ATEN Touch Panel, follow the steps below.

1. Download the Control System app from the product web page and save the file to a USB drive.
2. Insert the USB drive to the USB Type-A port.
3. Press the Function button to go to the system settings page.
4. Tap Storage. Under Portable Storage, tap the USB device you inserted.
5. Locate and tap the app file (.apk) to start the update.

Upgrading Firmware for ATEN Touch Panel

To upgrade the firmware on your ATEN Touch Panel, follow the steps below.

1. Download the ATEN Touch Panel firmware package from the product page.
2. Unzip the downloaded firmware package.
3. In the update folder, locate the update.zip file and save it to the root directory of a type-C USB flash drive, e.g. E:\

Compressed Folder Tools VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.20210202_USB driver File Home Share View Extract VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.20210202_USB driver VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.20210202_USB driver Search VK330_V1.1_1.11.11g.2... Quick access update 2/24/2021 10:55 AM Compressed (zipp... 425,315 KB Desktop

1. Insert the USB flash drive to the USB Type-A port of the Touch Panel.

2. Press the Function button to go to the system settings page.

3. Tap System > System updates.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to upgrade the firmware.

5. The touch panel reboots itself when the firmware upgrade is complete.

Note: The Control System App installed on the touch panel may not be of the same version after this upgrade. Update the app to obtain the latest features and benefits.

Accessories

VK401 Access Inspector

Components

Diagram of a device front panel with labeled ports and sound wave indicators

Simple line drawing of a battery with a top terminal and two side outlets (no text or symbols)

No.	Component Description
1	contact pins The contact pins transmit detected data to a VK330 Touch Panel.
2	detection area Detects access cards.
3	screw holes Use these screw holes and the provided screws to secure an Access Inspector to a VK330 Touch Panel.

Installing an Access Inspector to a VK330 Touch Panel

Make sure that you power off the VK330 Touch Panel and disconnect it from the power source before installing the Access Inspector.

Note: This application requires centralized management of the control system and Room Booking System (with at least one RBS panel) via ATEN Unizon. For more information, see ATEN Unizon User Manual and ATEN Room Booking System User Manual.

1. Attach the VK401 Access Inspector to the VK330 Touch Panel with the VK401's contact pins facing the contact pins of VK330 Touch Panel.

VK330 Rear View contact pins VK330 Side View VK401 Side View

1. Fasten the VK401 to the VK330 using the 2 supplied screws.

Top-down schematic of a device casing with labeled components and mounting points (no text or symbols)

1. Connect the VK330 to the power source and then switch its power switch to turn it on.

Chapter 3

Web-based Configuration and

Control

Overview

The ATEN controller can be configured over a standard TCP/IP connection via its built-in Graphical User Interface (GUI). Because it can be accessed from anywhere over a network or the Internet, operators can easily log in via a web browser. The web interface can be used to upload licenses, set the access key, enable monitors and upgrade the firmware.

Determining the IP Address of the Controller

• DHCP: When connected to a DHCP network, the ATEN controller is automatically assigned with an IP address upon startup. To determine the IP address of VK1200 / VK2200, see LCD Panel. To determine the IP address of other ATEN controllers, see IP Installer.
• Non-DHCP: When no dynamic IP address is assigned to the ATEN controllers within 30 seconds after startup, their default network settings are applied, as described below:

Models Default IP Address
VK1200 / VK2200	Control LAN 192.168.0.60
	LAN 192.168.1.60
Other ATEN controllers 192.168.0.60

LCD Panel

For VK1200 / VK2200, users can find its network information on the LCD panel, via Information, as illustrated below.

UK2200 Control Box ID [01] > IP CLAN 192.168.0.60 LAN 10.0.1.100 > NEXT << BACK TO MENU

IP Installer

Using a Windows PC, download the IP Installer zip file in Support and Downloads from the ATEN controller's product web page. Then extract and execute IPInstaller.exe. A window similar to the one below appears.

Network Device IP Installer Device list Device Name Model Name MAC Address IP Address PE8208A PE8208A 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 CN9500 CN9500 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.100 VK108US VK108US 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.100 RCM101A RCM101A 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 SN30CK SN3002P 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 vk2200 VK2200 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 VMO8C8HA VMO8C8HA 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 VK2100 VK2100 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 VK2100 VK2100 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 PN732D PN732D 00-00-00-00-00-00 10.0.00.60 Exit About IPv4 settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: 1.3 .41 .187 Subnet mask: 255 .255 .255 .5 Default gateway: 1.3 .41 .254 Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: 1.3 .41 .7 Alternate DNS server: 1.3 .41 .6 IPv6 settings Obtain an IPv6 address automatically (DHCP) Use the following IPv6 address: IPv6 address: Subnet profile length: Default gateway: Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server:

Make sure the proper network adapter is selected and click Enumerate to search for and display your ATEN controllers within the Device List.

Login

To access the GUI, type the IP address of the controller into the address bar of any browser. If a Security Alert dialog box appears, accept the certificate — it can be trusted. The Welcome screen appears:

WELCOME Enter Access Key Leg In

◆ The default access key is: password
- Allows up to 8 concurrent logins
◆ Supports Internet Explorer 11

Dashboard

Overview

The Dashboard appears when you successfully log in to the controller. The Dashboard gives a quick view of the current settings and provides a link (Edit button) to each configuration page.

◆ The top bar provides two options:

Click to enter the Settings page.

Click to log out of the web console.

- Other buttons and toggle controls include:

Button / Toggle Control	Function
	Click this button to access the configuration page.
	Click this button to access the Viewer in a separate web page for remote control.You can also use the URL to remotely access a Viewer from any device with web access or for third-party integration.
Viewer Access Key Setting	Enable this setting to request for the access key when uploading projects and Viewers to the ATEN controller or when downloading Viewers to mobile devices.
Monitor toggle buttons	Monitors configured for Flags and digital input devices are listed here. Click on the toggle buttons to enable or disable the monitors.

Settings

The Settings view contains tabs consisting of different configurations of the controller.

ATEN VK2200 Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN General Licenses Storage System Log Access Monitor Network Connections Schedule Security Controller Info Device Name WK200 Save Controller ID 15 Control Mode GUI Control LAN IP 10.3.66.220 MAC Address 00:10:74:23:40:2B LAN IP * MAC Address 00:10:74:23:00:2B Date & Time ● Automatically ● Manually Time Zone (GUT-12-00) Eniverse Kancelen 2001 01 05 18 56 36 Sync

The page is divided into two parts:

• Interactive Display Panel: configures the options
• Top Bar: provides icons to exit the settings page and log out of the web session.
• To access the settings page, log in the controller web GUI, and click
• To return to Dashboard, click

General

ATEN VK2200 Control Box Gen. 2 with Dual LAN General Licenses Storage System Log Access Monitor Network Connections Schedule Security Controller Info Device Name VK2200 Controller ID 15 Control Mode GUI Control LAN IP 10.3.65.220 MAC Address 00:10:74:23:40:2B LAN IP * MAC Address 00:10:74:23:00:2B Date & Time ● Automatically ● Manually Time Zone GMT-12 (R) Enwetla Krasatan Sync Firmware Current Firmware V9.8.306 Open

The General tab contains network information and the time and firmware upgrade settings.

Setting Descriptions

Controller Info Provides network and identification information pertaining to the controller.

◆ Device Name: Sets the device name.
◆ Controller ID: Displays the controller ID # set on the rear of the unit.
- Control Mode: Indicates the current configuration mode for the controller. Note that when the control mode changes from command-line to GUI mode, I/O configurations made through CLI will be lost.

- GUI mode: When the controller is in GUI mode, it means that the last configuration was made by uploading a Viewer to the controller or by resetting the controller.

Command-line mode: When the controller is in command-line mode, it means that the last configuration was made via command line interface.

- Control LAN IP: (Applicable to VK1200 / VK2200 only) Indicates the control LAN IP address.

MAC Address: (Applicable to VK1200 / VK2200 only) Indicates the control LAN IP address.

◆ IP Address: Provides the IP address of the controller.

- MAC Address: Provides the hardware MAC address of the controller.

Setting Descriptions
Date & Time	◆ Automatically◆ Time Zone: Select a time zone for the controller. Choose the city that most closely corresponds to where it is located.NTP Server SettingsAssign an NTP server for the controller to synchronizes its clock. If the controller has access to the Internet, configure the Preferred NTP Server and Alternate NTP Server settings. If the controller is installed in a closed network, configure the Preferred Customer Server IP and Alternate Customer Server IP settings.◆ Preferred NTP Server: Select an NTP server to provide synchronization services to the controller. Make sure to use an NTP server that is located close to where the controller is installed to minimize propagation delays.◆ Alternate NTP Server: Select an alternate NTP server to which the controller connects when it is unable to connect to the preferred NTP server.◆ Preferred Customer Server IP: Select this option to use a private NTP server if the controller is installed in a closed network.◆ Alternate Customer Server IP: Select this option to set up a substitute server if the controller is unable to connect to the preferred server.◆ Adjust Time: Sets the interval at which the controller synchronizes its clock with the assigned NTP server.◆ Sync: Click this button to save your configuration and start synchronizing its clock with the assigned NTP server.◆ Manually: Use the drop-down lists to set the controller's time zone, date, and time.
Firmware	◆ Displays the current firmware version of the controller and option to upgrade/downgrade the firmware.◆ To upgrade/downgrade the firmware, click Update.Important: Since the controller file system uses EXT2 for firmware version 3.0 onward instead of FAT32 for prior versions, downgrading a controller firmware from version 3.0 (or from any later version) to a version prior to 3.0 will result in file formatting. In this case, make sure to back up your project file before the downgrade.◆ Select Check FW Version for the controller to check if the device firmware is a later version than the browsed firmware file, and display the result.

Licenses for Mobile Control

A license is a software permit that an ATEN controller grants to a mobile device for remote control. If you have three licenses for a controller, you can have three mobile devices remotely operate the controller at the same time.

Note: When using an ATEN Touch Panel for remote control, make sure to upgrade the controller to version 2.8 or later, which recognizes the Touch Panel as an ATEN device and will not require a license.

Refer to the table below for the number of free licenses and the maximum number of paid licenses each controller supports. To purchase additional copies of license, contact your local sales representative.

Licenses	ATEN Control Box		ATEN Control Pad (VK0100 / VK0200)
	VK1100A / VK2100A	VK1200 / VK2200
No. of free licenses 2 2 0
Maximum no. of licenses 16 32 10

You can use the Licenses tab to:

• Find out the total number of licenses, the number of licenses that are available, and those that are in use
  ◆ Upload licenses to the ATEN controller
  ◆ View license information

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule (Total 2 license) #1 Alen iPad #2 8320N-MIKET Add Users OffLine OffLine B Offline B Offline

Setting Description
Licenses	◆ In Use: displays the number of licenses being used by mobile devices.◆ Not in Use: displays the number of licenses available for use.◆ Total shows the number of licenses purchased for the controller.
Update License	Clicking Add License opens the Add License window to import new licenses to the controller.
Remove	When a device is accessing the controller, you can click the Remove button to disconnect the session.

Storage

The Storage tab displays the following information:

Setting Descriptions
Flash This section	shows the total amount of flash memory on the controller, as well as the space used and the space available for storing Viewers.
RAM This section	shows the total space of working memory on the controller, as well as the space used and the space available for processing.
Existing Viewer	This section lists all the Viewers that are stored on the controller with their name and the assigned room(s). Click Remove to delete a single Viewer or Remove All to delete all Viewers from the controller. Click View to access the Viewer in a separate web page for remote control. For more information, see Access Viewers in Web URL for Remote Control, page 85.

Access Viewers in Web URL for Remote Control

You can remotely operate controller-managed environments on any computer or mobile device by accessing Viewers from the controller's web GUI. This renders Viewers in separate web pages, allowing you to save these pages to ATEN Unizon or any third-party platform that support web page embed for convenient access and control.

1. Log in the controller web GUI with a valid access key. The Dashboard page appears.

1. From the Existing Viewer section, click View. The Viewer appears in a separate web page. For example:

Not secure https://10.3.66.220/index.html?GUIName=00000000_0042006F006100... ATEN Boardroom Mute Exit Digital Board Left TV None None Right TV None ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF PC HDMI A HDMI B HDMI C Camera (Front) Camera (Left) Camera (Right) Camera (Rear) Wireless Home Meeting Wall Display Monitor Audio Mic Camera AirCon Light

Click on the page to perform control actions.

Access

The Access tab allows you to configure the access key (password) of the ATEN controller's web interface and to set a validity period for accessing the ATEN Control System using an activation key.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Monitor Network Connections Schedule Security Access Key Show an dashboard Current Access Key New Access Key Confirm Access Key ■ Enactive Viewer Accrual Key Gain Gain Activation Key ■ Your access to ATEN Control System will expire in 5 days. Contact your system integrator to obtain the activation key required to regain access. Activation Key Confirm Activation Key Gain Gain

Setting Description

Access Key The

access key is the password that is required to do the following:◆ Log in the ATEN controller's web interface.◆ Upload projects and Viewers from Configurator to ATEN controller (page 245).Download Viewers from ATEN controller to mobile devices using ATEN Control System App (page 311).The following settings are available:◆ Current Access Key, New Access Key, Confirm Access Key: Use these three fields to set or change the access key. The default access key ispassword.IMPORTANT: You will be prompted to modify the access key before you can continue with accessing the web GUI or uploading project files.Note: A valid password should only contain upper-case alphabets, lower-case alphabets, and/or numerals.◆ Show on dashboard: Select this option to show the access key setting on the Dashboard tab.◆ Viewer Access Key: Select this option to request for the access key when uploading projects and Viewers to the ATEN controller or when downloading Viewers to mobile devices. Once enabled, you can also configure this setting from the Dashboard tab.

Setting Description

Activation Key The activation key is a string of letters and numbers used to assign a validity period of accessing the ATEN Control System.To set up a validity period for accessing the ATEN Control System:1. Select Your access to ATEN Control System will expire in and type the number of days.2. Type an activation key. Follow the guidelines below when creating your activation key:Max number of characters: 32Allowed characters: uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and underscoreMax. number of days: 999 days3. Type the activation key again to confirm.4. Click Save. The limit is immediately applied. For example:[IMAGE]Note: Keep the activation key somewhere secure because it cannot be recovered. In case you forget the activation key, press the reset button/switch for 8 seconds to set the ATEN controller to default. This will reset all configuration of the controller to default and remove any projects and Viewers stored on the ATEN controller.To disable the validity period, click Enter Activation Key to type the activation key provided by the system integrator.

Monitor

The Monitor tab allows you to view and enable the monitors that have been configured for Flags and digital input devices in ATEN Configurator. Check the Show on dashboard box to show the Monitor settings on the Dashboard. Click the slide bar next to the monitor you want to enable or use the drop-down menu to select All On or All Off.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Monitor Show on dashboard All Seed Note

For more information about creating monitors, see Monitor, page 196.

Network

The Network tab allows you to view and configure the controller's network settings. Select Manually to set a static IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway, or Use DHCP to have the server assign an IP address to the controller.

Note: Make sure to set the ATEN controller's IP address and Default Gateway to the same subnet.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Network Get IP Address ● Manually ● Use DHCP IP Address 10 2 49 100 Subnet Mask 265 265 265 0 Default Gateway 10 3 41 254 Get DNS Server ● Automatically ● Manually Preferred DNS Server 10 2 3 7 Alternate DNS Server 10 2 3 6 Save Cancel

Working as a DHCP Server

For VK1200 / VK2200 only, the control box can operate as a DHCP server for automated assigning dynamic IP addresses to all of the LAN devices managed via its Control LAN. To do this, follow the steps below.:

Control LAN Get IP Address Enable DHCP Server IP Address 10.3.41.149 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 10.3.41.254 IP Assigned Range 192.168.0.61 - 192.168.0.254 Lease Time (sec.) 7200

1. From the Get IP Address drop-down list, select Enable DHCP Server, and optionally change the network settings of the ATEN Control System, namely IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
2. Next to IP Assigned Range, define the desired range of IP that can be used for assigning IP addresses to the connecting IP devices.
3. Next to Lease Time, define the amount of time an assigned IP address becomes available for use after the IP device it is previously assigned to has been inactive for.

Connections

The Connections tab allows you to view the connection statuses and IP addresses of licensed devices, ATEN Keypads, and ATEN Expansion Boxes.

General	Licenses	Storage	System Log	Access Key	Monitor	Network	Connections	Schedule
Licensed Devices and Keypads
		Name	ID	IP Address	Status
#1		8320N-MIKET	N/A	N/A	Offline
#2		8060P-CHRISTINE	N/A	N/A	Offline
Expansion Box
		Name	ID	IP Address	Status

Schedule

The Schedule tab lists scheduled events predefined using the ATEN Configurator. You can use this tab to do the following:

• Enable or disable scheduled events.
  ◆ Enable or disable scheduled days

For details on setting up scheduled events, see Scheduled Events, page 220.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Schedule Event Name Repeat Time OPEN Weekly Sunday [08:00] Monday [08:00] Tuesday [08:00] Wednesday [08:00] Thursday [08:00] Friday [00:00] Saturday [00:00] CLOSE Weekly Sunday [18:00] Monday [18:00] Tuesday [18:00] Wednesday [18:00] Thursday [18:00] Friday [00:00] Saturday [00:00]

Security

The Security tab allows you to configure SSL and TSL settings to secure the browsing sessions between your computer and the ATEN controller's web interface.

• SSL Certificate: To enable SSL encryption on the controller, purchase and obtain an SSL certificate from a trusted certifying authority and click Upload to apply the certificate.
• TLS Support: Each ATEN controller supports TLS 1.0, 1.1, and 1.2 to allow communications with devices supporting different versions of the TLS. If you have any security concerns, disable the Enable TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 setting to only allow communications among devices that support TLS 1.2 and click Save.

General Licenses Storage System Log Access Key Monitor Network Connections Schedule Security SSL Certificate Redox Default Used TLS Support Enable TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.1 yes

Chapter 4

ATEN Configurator (VK6000)

Overview

The ATEN Configurator (VK6000) is a GUI-based management tool that helps you set up and configure the connected hardware and create control interfaces (Viewer), to be used on control interfaces including mobile devices, ATEN Keypads, ATEN Control Pads and ATEN Touch Panel.

Installing ATEN Configurator

To install the ATEN Configurator software, do the following:

1. Download ATEN Configurator.

a) Visit the ATEN download page.
http://www.aten.com/global/en/support-and-downloads/downloads/
b) Search for "VK6000". A list of downloads for VK6000 appear.
c) Click ATEN_configurator_software_x.x.xxx.zip to download.

1. Open the downloaded zip file and double-click

ATEN_configurator_software_x.x.xxx.exe to run the setup. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for VK6000 The InstallShield Wizard will install VK6000 on your computer. To continue, click Next. < Back Next > Cancel

3. Click Next. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully. Software End User License Agreement You may use our software and services only on the condition that you agree to abide by the following terms. We sincerely recommend that you shall read this Agreement very carefully. BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING OR USING OUR SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING ELECTRONICALLY TO THE TERMS OF THIS SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE I accept the terms of the license agreement I do not accept the terms of the license agreement Print < Back Next > Cancel

4. If you agree with the License Agreement, select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and click Next. Click Print to print the Software End User License Agreement. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where setup will install files. Install VK6000 to: C:\Program Files\ATEN\VK6000 Change... InstallShield < Back Next > Cancel

1. To change the destination location, click Change. Click Next to proceed using the default location. This screen appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation. Click Install to begin the installation. If you want to review or change any of your installation settings, click Back. Click Cancel to exit the wizard. InstallShield < Back Install Cancel

1. Click Install. When the process is complete, a confirmation message appears.

VK6000 - InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed VK6000. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

1. Click Finish.

Getting Started Tasks

After you have installed and launched the ATEN Configurator, the main screen (page 98) appears. You will be guided to create and configure a project using the 4 tabs in the Configurator's interface, as illustrated below.

graph LR
    A["1. Project"] --> B["2. Device"]
    B --> C["3. Design"]
    C --> D["4. Upload"]

Hint: You can click the tabs to switch among different pages for configuration.

The steps below provides an overview of the getting started tasks.

1. In the Project tab, do the following.

2. Provide information about the ATEN controller that you have set up.

3. (Optional) Provide client information for the specified ATEN controller.

Click Add Controller if you have more than one controller in the environment.

Click Start Project to proceed.

1. In the Device tab, do the following.

2. Connect each controller with its managed devices by adding them to the controller's Device Configuration list, enter the connection settings, and specify the physical locations.

3. (Optional) Add another controller and/or Expansion Box to the project by clicking Add Controller or Expander.
4. Connect the Expansion Box with its managed devices by adding them to the Expansion Box’s Device Configuration list.

For more details, see Configuring Managed Devices, page 109.

Click Design or the Viewer tab to proceed.

ATEN Configurator - [Untitled Project.vkproj*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Controll... Viewer ... Unizon VK2200-ID01 × Device Configuration

1. In the Design tab, do the following.

2. Create and configure a control interface (Viewer). For more information, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 127.

3. (Optional) Set up scheduled events to automatically carry out specified actions.
   ♦ (Optional) Add additional conditions and actions to buttons using Flags. For details, see Flag, page 194.
4. (Optional) Create a sequence of actions for a button by creating a Macro. For details, see Macro, page 218.

5. (Optional) Create a Variable for a device setting that is controlled by two or more objects in one control interface. For details, see Variables, page 222.

6. In the Upload tab, upload this Viewer to the controller. For details, see The Upload Tab, page 245.

Main Screen

Overview

Double-click the Configurator.exe shortcut to open the ATEN Configurator software. The Project page appears:

ATEN Configurator File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload Project Information Name Unified Project Controller Mode Mode Controller Add Console Client Information Controller ID ID-1 ATENController Type VK2200 Number of Room(s) 1 Name Optional Address Optional Phone Optional Note Optional Options Start Project

No.	Control Description
1	Menu Bar The menu bar contains a group of the Configurator ‘s main functions by category. For details, see Menu Bar, page 99.
2	Project Bar	The Project Bar contains four tab and the Library icon. Each tab relates to a step required to set up the project. Each step and the Library can be selected by clicking on the bar.
3	Interactive Display Panel	This is the main work area. The page that appears here reflects the project tab that is selected.
4	Library The Library contains the devices, graphic, flag, macro, and monitor databases. Each section allows you to add custom items or choose from ready made selections.
5	Toggle Bar These three icons are used as a toggle to show or hide the right, left and bottom control panel.
6	Simulator The Simulator button is used to test the Viewer after it is created in Design. The simulator allows you to tryout the interface as it would work on a mobile device but without actually controlling devices. Use the mouse to click through the page links.

Menu Bar

The menu bar contains the Configurator's main functions arranged by category. Refer to the table below to find out what each function does.

Menu Sub-Menu Description
File New	Project Select to create a new project.
	Open Project Select to browse and	open a previously saved project.
	Restore Project from Controller Do	wnloads a previously backed up project from a controller.
	Close Closes the current project and	returns to the Project tab.
	Save Select to save changes to the	current project.
	Save as Use this option to save the	project as a different name.
	Export Viewer to USB(Not supported by ATEN Control Pad)	Exports Viewers and an access key to a USB drive. After exporting the data onto a USB drive, plug the USB drive into the Control Box's USB port to upload the Viewer files and the access key. These files can only be read by the Control Box and are not project files that can be opened by the ATEN Configurator software.
	Project Report Click to save a PDF
	Add KNX Device	Import ETS Project
		Add Custom KNX Device
	Recent Projects Select to view a list of recent projects that can be clicked on to open.
	Exit Select to close the project and exit.
Menu Sub-Menu			Description
Edit Undo	Select to undo a change when editing a Viewer in Create & Design Viewer.
	Redo Select to redo a change when editing a Viewer page in Create & Design Viewer.
	Cut/Copy/Paste Select to cut, copy		or paste text and objects when editing a Viewer page in Create & Design Viewer. When used to copy and paste a button, both the General and Action properties are copied.
	Paste Graphic Only Select to paste		a button's image but not its Action properties in Create & Design Viewer.
	Delete Select to delete highlighted		text and images when editing a page in Create & Design Viewer.
	Delete Action Only Select to delete		the Action properties of a button in Create & Design Viewer.
	Select All / Deselect All Use either		option to select or unselect all objects when editing a viewer page in Create & Design Viewer.
	Preferences Display	Language	Use to select the language for the interface.
		SSH Destination Click to choose the location of the executable for the SSH Client software. To execute the program, go to Tools > SSH Client.
		Interface Check a box to enable the feature described below:Show Welcome Page: displays the Welcome screen when the ATEN Configurator software opens.Auto Page Creation: automatically creates a Viewer page in Create Viewer & Design, for every hardware device that is configured in Select Device & Configuration.Show Password: displays the characters of the access key in the Edit Access Key dialog box.Automatically check for updates: automatically checks for updates and notify the user when an update is available.

Menu Sub-Menu Description
View	These options are available from Create Viewer & Design Edit Viewer.
	Zoom Zooms the Viewer page to 25%, 50%,75%, 100%, 200% or Fit in Window.Note:A mouse wheel can be used to zoom the Viewer page in or out.
	Project Information Select to go to	Project Information.
	Device Configuration Select to go to	Select Device &Configuration.
	Viewer Design Select to go to Create Viewer & Design.
	Project Upload Select to go to Search & Upload.
	Properties Select to show/hide the	Propertieswindow when editing a Viewer page.
	Align to Grid Select to automatically	align objects withthe grid. This places objects in perfectalignment with the grid dots when theyare moved. Use Show Grid to displaythe grid dots. When Align to Grid is notselected, objects can be placedanywhere on the page.
	Show Grid Select to display the grid	dots on thepage. Use with the Align to Grid optionto set objects in perfect alignment on thepage.
	Show Object ID Select to show object	ID at the top-rightcorner of each object. An object ID isused to specify an object in someconfiguration.

Menu Sub-Menu Description
Object	These options are available from Create Viewer & Design Edit Viewer.
	Button Adds a button to the Viewer	page.
	Text Adds a text box to the Viewer	page.
	Image Adds an image to the Viewer	page.
	Scroll View Adds a scroll box to the	Viewer page,then double-click it to add buttons. Use the box as a scroll window to easily access a list of buttons on the page.
	Video Adds a video box which allows you to view video. The video box can be resized using the Properties sidebar or by dragging a small box on the boarder to resize it to the desired shape.
	Slider Bar Adds a slider bar to the	Viewer page.Slider bars are used to adjust the value of a device setting, such as the volume level of an audio device.
Menu	Sub-Menu		Description
Object PowerPoint Control Template Adds a PowerPoint Control template to the Viewer. This control template is used to control PowerPoint files saved in a target computer.
Menu Sub-Menu Description
Object Align Left Aligns two	or more selected	objects to the Left side of the object that is selected last.
	Center Aligns two	or more selected objects to the horizontal position of the object that is selected last.
	Right Aligns two or	more selected objects to the Right side of the object that is selected last.
	Top Aligns two or	more selected objects to the Top side of the object that is selected last.
	Middle Aligns two	or more selected objects to the vertical position of the object that is selected last.
	Bottom Aligns two	or more selected objects to the Bottom side of the object that is selected last.
Make Same Size	Width Resizes two	or more selected objects to the same width of the object that is selected last.
	Height Resizes two	or more selected objects to the same height of the object that is selected last.
	Both Resizes two	or more selected objects to the same width and height of the object that is selected last.
Space Evenly	Across Page Width	Spaces two or more selected objects evenly across the width of the page.
	Across Page Height	Spaces two or more selected objects evenly across the height of the page.
	Between Objects Horizontally	Adjusts the horizontal space between three or more selected objects to the average distance between each of the selected objects.
	Between Objects Vertically	Adjusts the vertical space between three or more selected objects to the average distance between each of the selected objects.
Menu	Sub-Menu	Description
Tools Database Generator Opens the ATEN	Database Generatorwhich is used to manually add andconfigure hardware devices. This iswhere you can create custom devices toadd to My Device Library. See ATEN Database Generator, page 249, fordetails.
	Simulator The Simulator is used to	test a Viewer'sinterface after it has been created in Design. The simulator allows you totryout the interface as it would work on amobile device but without actuallycontrolling devices. Use the mouse toclick through the page links.
	SSH Client This runs the SSH Client software
Windows	New Page Click to create a new Viewer page orselect a page to open in Create Viewer& Design.
Help About	Provides the firmware version andsupport information for the Configuratorsoftware.
	Check for Updates Checks if ATEN	Configurator is up-to-date.
	Training Videos (Basic) Click to see how-to videos on tasksinvolved in configuring a project file.
	Training Videos (Advanced) Click to see how-to videos on usingadvanced features such as creating avariable, creating a driver usingdatabase generator, and more.
	Driver Downloads Click to download drivers for third-partydevices.
	What's New Click to see new features and functionsin this version.

Creating Projects

The Project tab allows you to enter details about the installation to start the project. Enter the information using the table below as a guide.

ATEN Configurator - [] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Uploaded Project Information Name Untitled Project Controller Mode ID Mode Controller Add Controller Controller ID ID-1 ATEN Controller Type VK2200 Number of Room(s) 1 Controller ID ID-2 ATEN Controller Type VK1200 Number of Room(s) 1 Remove Controller Controller ID ID-3 ATEN Controller Type VK0200 Number of Room(s) 1 Remove Controller Client Information Name Optional Address Optional Phone Optional Note Optional StartProject

Control Description

Name Enter the project name you are setting up. You can create multiple projects but for most installations only one project is required.

Control Description
Controller Mode	Click to specify how controllers in this project file connect to Expansion Boxes and Keypads.♦ ID Mode (default)♦ Controllers connect to Expansion Boxes or ATEN Keypads by matching controller ID, as set using the controller ID switch on the controller panel and configured in the project file (see Controller ID field below) with the controller ID set on the Expansion Box or Keypad.♦ Using the ID mode, a controller can connect up to 8 Keypads of the same model and 8 Expansion Boxes of the same model.♦ IP Mode♦ Controllers connect to Expansion Boxes / ATEN Keypads through their IP address.Note: When IP Mode is selected, controllers do not use any ID settings on ATEN Keypads or Expansion Boxes as the basis for their connection. However, the controller ID on the controller panel and the project file need to match to successfully apply the configuration.♦ Using the IP mode, the maximum numbers of ATEN Expansion Boxes that controllers can connect are as follows:♦ VK0100 / VK0200: 16♦ VK1100A / VK2100A: 32♦ VK1200 / VK2200: 64♦ Using the IP mode, the maximum numbers of ATEN Keypads that controllers can connect are as follows:♦ VK0100 / VK0200: 10♦ VK1100A / VK2100A: 16♦ VK1200 / VK2200: 32
Add Controller Click to	add controllers to the project. The number added should match the number of controllers installed. A project can have up to 16 controllers.
Controller ID Displays	the controller ID. Make sure the ID in this field matches the ID on the controller so that the project file will be uploaded to the specified controller.
ATEN Controller Type	Select the model for the controller.
Number of Rooms Enter	the number of rooms each controller will control. Each hardware device you add will be associated with a room. When buttons are configured in the Design tab, you can select a Room under Button Action to filter the Device list so that only hardware in that room appears. This link between the controller, devices and room is how the Viewer knows which devices to control.
Name Enter the client name associated with the project.
Address Enter the client address associated with the project.
Phone Enter the client phone number associated with the project.
Remove Controller Click to delete a controller from the project.
Start Project	Click to begin configuring hardware devices. The Select Device & Configuration tab will open.

Configuring Managed Devices

Overview

The Device tab is used to configure controller ports according to the connected hardware device.

ATEN Configurator - [Untitled Project vkproj*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload Control Viewer Unión VK2100-ID01 VK2100-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1 I/O 1 None Output Room-1 I/O 2 None Output Room-1 I/O 3 None Output Room-1 I/O 4 None Output Room-1 IR 1 None IR Room-1 IR 2 None IR Room-1 IR 3 None IR Room-1 IR 4 None IR Room-1 Relay 1 None Room-1 Relay 2 None Room-1 Relay 3 None Room-1 Relay 4 None Room-1 Ethernet 1 None Room-1 Add Context & Options Add Port Device Configuration VK2100-ID01 Properties Name AddDevice Category Audio Contenance Blank Model Version Connection Settings Board Plate: 36000 Data Bit: 8 Stop Bit: 1 Party Name Advanced

Control Description
DeviceConfigurationList	This section lists the ports for each controller, their connected device, connection mode, device location (room) and if the device is managed by UnizonTM. Click on a controller, expansion box or Room in the left sidebar to display the ports. Each port needs to be configured according to the hardware device connected to it. For details, see Left Sidebar, page 110.
Left Sidebar The	left sidebar provides a tree view of the ATEN Control System deployment in each project. Use the sidebar to add/remove a controller, Expansion Box, or Room.
Properties This	section allows you to add and configure controllers, Expansion Boxes, managed devices, and rooms. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 127.
Device Library	Click this icon to open the Library on the Device Library tab which contains a database of hardware devices that can be added to the Device Configuration list. For details, see Device Library, page 126.

Left Sidebar

Control... Viewer ... Unizon VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VK236-ID01 VK248-ID01 VK258-ID01 Room-1 VE8950 VE8900 VM0808H Switch VS481A Switch-1 VM1616T B96 VK2200-ID02 Room-2 VE8950-1 B96-1 B96A Add Controller or Expander Add Room

Controller

The Left Sidebar provides a tree view of the controllers, Expansion Boxes, and rooms. Each controller in the tree view represents a controller with one or more rooms it manages. Selecting a controller allows you to configure its ports. When a port is configured for a device, it appears listed under the Room.

Each controller must contain at least one room. When installing multiple controllers in one room, add a room with the same name to each controller.

Each controller name ends with an ID number: e.g. VK2200-ID02. This ID number is automatically generated when the controller is added into the project. You can also configure this ID in the controller properties settings.

Use this number to set the Controller ID Switch on the rear of the controller. This links the controller in the software to the physical device being installed.

Right-click a controller to Add Room or Delete Controller.

Room

Each room is associated with a controller and a Viewer so that the information is uploaded to the correct controller to control the hardware devices. Right click a room to Delete or Rename the room. Use the buttons at the bottom of the sidebar to Add Room.

Expansion Box

ATEN Expansion Boxes connect over a network to add ports to the controller via its Ethernet port. Clicking Add Controller or Expander opens a window which allows you to select a device to add.

Device Configuration List

The Device Configuration page lists the controller ports by type. Click a port to view its Properties. Double-click a port to open the ATEN Device Library and search for the hardware device to configure the port. Configure each port according to the hardware device connected to it.

Device Configuration
VK2100-ID01
Type Device Mode Room Unizon
Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1
I/O 1 None Output Room-1
I/O 2 None Output Room-1
I/O 3 None Output Room-1
I/O 4 None Output Room-1
IR 1 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
IR 2 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
IR 3 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
IR 4 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices
Relay 1 None Room-1
Relay 2 None Room-1
Relay 3 None Room-1
Relay 4 None Room-1
Ethernet 1 None Room-1 + Add More Devices
VK224-ID01
Type Device Mode Room Unizon
Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1
Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1
VK248-ID01
Type Device Mode Room Unizon
Relay 1 None Room-1
Relay 2 None Room-1
Relay 3 None Room-1

Control Description
Type Lists the	ports of the controller.
Device Lists the	device name entered in Properties.
Mode Lists the	port's communication mode. Click an arrow to select options:♦ Serial: RS-232, RS-422, or RS-485♦ I/O: Input (VDC), Input (Dry Contact) or Output♦ IR: IR or R-S232
Room Lists the	room selected for a device. The rooms available depend on the number of rooms added to the controller. No drop-down menu appears if there is only one room. Each controller must have at least one room. Select the room where the device is installed.
Unizon^TM Select	ct this option to allow Unizon^TM to manage and monitor the corresponding device.Note:Configuration will also be required on Unizon^TM for this feature to work. For an overview of how to set up the function, see Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon^TM , page 237.
+ Add More Devices	RS-422, R-S485, LAN and IR ports can cascade additional devices that are connected to the first unit. IR ports can cascade 1 device, RS-422 and RS-485 ports can cascade up to 2 devices and LAN ports can cascade up to 25 devices.

Adding Devices to the Device Configuration List

Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator

To add devices that are not KNX compliant, use one of the following methods.

Via ATEN Device Library or My Library

1. In the Device Configuration list, click a port where you have physically installed a device.

VK2200-ID01 × VK2100-ID02 Device Configuration VK2200-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon ① Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1

1. Click library. In the pop-up window, click the drop-down list to select ATEN Device Library or My Device Library, and then double-click an item to add the device. The selected device is added to Device Configuration.

VK2200-ID01 × VK2100-ID02 Device Configuration VK2200-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon 0 Serial 1 VM5161GH RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 7 None RS232 Room-1

Via the Properties Column

1. In the Device Configuration list, click a port where you have physically installed a device.

VK2200-ID01 × VK2100-ID02 Device Configuration VK2200-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1

1. Use one of the following to add a device.

Select from Library:

Use this method to automatically bring in default settings for the selected device.

(a) Click the arrow button and select Add device from the Library to open the Library.

Properties Name Add Device Add device from the Library

(b) Click the drop-down list to select ATEN Device Library or My Device Library, and then double-click an item to add the device.

- Specify and configure settings

Use this method to type and configure each setting for the device. When the configuration is complete, click Add Device.

Properties Name Add Device

Note:

If the device is not in the Library, create the device using Database Generator. For details, see Editing / Adding a New Device, page 256.

ATEN Device Library ATEN Device Library My Device Library Create Device IR Relay Ethernet Version Property Switch Switch Switch V1.0 Output Lift Lift Lift V1.0 Output Screen Screen Screen V1.0 Output

Adding KNX Devices

There are two ways to add KNX devices into ATEN Control System projects:

• Add a KNX device individually (page 115)
• Import a pre-configured ETS project (page 116)

Adding a KNX Device

1. In the Devices tab, go to File > Add KNX Device > Add Custom KNX Device. A KNX IP Interface (with a default room) is added.

1. Project 2. Device 3 Con... Vi... Uniz... KNX IP Interface Default Room VK2200-ID01 VK224111 Room-1 VK1200-ID02 Room-2 KNX Typ

1. On the controller where you wish to add the KNX device, right-click the controller and then select Add KNX Room > Default Room.

The KNX device is added.

Con... Vi... Uniz... KNX IP Interface Default Room VK2200-ID01 VK236 Room-1 VK2200-ID02 VK248 Room-2 Default Room VK1200-ID03 Room-3

Importing an ETS Project

1. In the Devices tab, go to File > Add KNX Device > Import ETS Project. The configurations for your KNX devices appear in the Controller tab on the left-side bar.
2. In the Controller tab, click on KNX IP Interface and type its IP address and port in the Properties column.

Device Properties

The Properties panel provides information and configuration fields for controllers, Expansion Boxes, remote devices, or rooms. Click a device or room from the left sidebar or the Device Configuration list to display its properties.

Controller Properties

Properties Name VK2200 Controller ID ID01 Brand ATEN

Click a controller from the left sidebar or from the Device Configuration list to configure or view the following properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.
◆Controller ID: Sets the controller ID. With the controller set to ID mode (Creating Projects, page 106), the controller connects to ATEN Expansion Box and Keypad by matching this ID with that set on the Expansion Box or Keypad.

Expansion Box (Expander)

Click an expansion box from the left sidebar or from the Device Configuration list to configure or view the following properties

Properties Name VK224 Expander ID ID01 Brand ATEN Connection Settings IP Address Optional

◆ Name: Displays the device model.
- Expander ID: Select the expander ID. Make sure the ID matches the one set physically on the Expansion Box.
- IP Address: Specify the IP address of the expansion box. This setting is only required when the connection mode (with the controller) is set to IP mode. For more information, see Creating Projects, page 106.

Serial Device Properties

Properties

Name

VM1600

Remove

Category

Video Matrix Switches

Brand

ATEN

Model

VM1600

Version

V1.3.126

Connection Settings

Baud Rate

19200

Data Bit

Stop Bit

Parity

None

Advanced

Delay Interval

Seconds

Feedback Timeout

Seconds

End Character

Keep Connection Alive

Format

ASCII

HEX

Command

Interval

1.0

Seconds (1.0\~60.0)

Click a serial device from the Device Configuration list to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.

- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 113.

◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.

- Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.

◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.

◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the drop-down menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 256).

- Connection Settings: Click the drop-down lists to configure the baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity settings, and flow control for the selected serial device.

◆Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the following settings.

◆Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

- Feedback Timeout: Sets the maximum interval that the controller allows in between parts of a feedback message. The controller uses this value to identify the end of a message.

• End Character: Type the end-of-text character of the device to inform controller the end of a message and to shorten the response time.
• Keep Connection Alive: The controller sends a command to the serial device to maintain the connection and avoid timeout issues.

◆ Command: Type a command to be sent to the selected device.

- Interval: Type the interval at which the controller sends the command.

I/O Device Properties

Properties Name Switch-1 Remove Category Switch Brand Switch Model Switch Version V1.0 Advanced Delay Interval 0 Seconds

Click an I/O device from the Device Configuration list and select Input (VDC), Input (Dry Contact), or Output to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.
- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 113.
◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.
◆Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.
◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.
◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the dropdown menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a

PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 256).

• Lower Threshold & Upper Threshold: Set the thresholds according to the hardware device you are connecting and then configure a Monitor (see page 196).
  ◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the Delay Interval setting.

- Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

IR/Relay Device Properties

Properties Name VS481A Remove Category Video Switches Brand ATEN Model VS481A Version V2.0.195 Advanced Delay Interval 0 Seconds

Click an IR/Relay device from the Device Configuration list to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.
- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 113.
◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.
◆Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.
◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.
◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the dropdown menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be

manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 256).

◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the Delay Interval setting.

- Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.

Ethernet Device Properties

Properties

Name

ControlAssist

Remove

Category

Tool

Brand

ATEN

Model

ControlAssist

Version

V1.2

Connection Settings

Protocol Type

HTTPS

IP Address

10.3.41.121

Port

6277

Username

administrator

Password

********

Delay Interval

0

Seconds

Click an Ethernet device to configure its properties.

◆Name: Displays the device model.

- Add Device: Use this button to add devices. For details, see Adding Non-KNX-Compliant Devices to ATEN Configurator, page 113.

◆Category: Displays the category of the selected device.

◆Brand: Displays the brand of the selected device.

◆Model: Displays the model of the selected device.

◆Version: Shows the firmware version selected for the device. Use the dropdown menu to select a different firmware version. Click the menu box next to the version number to open a PDF with the version history. The version history and different versions for a device can be manually added/updated via the Database Generator (see step 3 of Editing / Adding a New Device, page 256).

- Connection Settings

Depending on the selected protocol, some of the following settings may not be required and are not displayed.

• Protocol Type: Click to select the protocol for the Ethernet device. The ATEN Control System supports control of devices via telnet, ONVIF, TCP, UDP, HTTP, HTTPS, and WebSocket. Configure the following fields as required.
  IP Address: Type to assign a fixed IP address to the Ethernet device.
• Port: Type to assign a communication port.
• Username & Password: Type the device's login/access credentials.
• VE Manager Password: Type the administrator password of the VE Manager to allow the controller to access video sources connected to the video extenders managed by the VE Manager.
• Auth Type: Sets the authentication type that the device uses.
• URIPath: Type the part of the WebSocket URI that follows its communication port. For example, if the URI is wss://:31416/Dicentis/API, type Dicentis/API in this field.
  SubProtocol: Type the subprotocol for the Ethernet device. This information shall be available in the device's reference or user manual.
• WSS: Select to encrypt the WebSocket connection.
• Edit Additional Info:

◆ ExtHeader: Type the required data for handshake header.

◆ Extension: Type the required data for the Sec-WebSocket-Extensions header field.

- Edit Login Command: Click to edit the login command.

◆ Monitor Connection

- Check Status (ICMP): Select this option to allow the controller to send control messages to receive connection status for this Ethernet device.

Note: To allow the online/offline status to be accessible to Unizon ^™ for remote management, select the Unizon ^™ checkbox that corresponds to the device in the Device Configuration list.

- NOP (for Telnet only): Select this option to send a no-operation command to the remote end of a Telnet connection to maintain the connection status of the device with controller.

- Stream: To allow video streaming to the controller via RTSP, select this option and type the streaming IP address, port, and login credentials of the Ethernet device.

◆ Advance Settings: Click Advanced to display the Delay Interval setting.

• Delay Interval: Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.
• Delay after Login (for telnet only): Sets a delay (to allow a connection to be established) before the First and Second Commands are sent to the device.
• Feedback Timeout: Sets the maximum interval that the controller allows in between parts of a feedback message. The controller uses this value to identify the end of a message.
• End character: Type the end-of-text character of the device to inform controller the end of a message and to shorten the response time.
• Send command after connection (for telnet and TCP only): Sends commands to the device after a successful connection has been established.

♦ Format: Sets the command format.
- First Command: Sets the command.
Second Command: Sets the second command.
- Automatically reconnect if no return message is received: Select this option to continue reconnection attempts when no return message is received from the device.

- Keep Connection Alive (for telnet and TCP only): The controller sends a command to the device to maintain the connection and avoid timeout issues.

◆ Command: Type a command to be sent to the selected device.
- Interval: Type the interval at which the controller sends the command.

Migrating Devices to another Controller

When you migrate a managed device from one controller to another, you can have its configuration duplicated without setting it up again.

To migrate the configuration of a managed device to another controller, follow the steps below.

1. Click the Devices tab.
2. In the left sidebar, right-click the device you wish to migrate.
3. In the pop-up menu, select Switch To, and then select the controller, and a port to which you wish to migrate. The device and its configuration is moved immediately.

Library

The Project Bar provides the Library option. Use the Device Library tab (shown below) to configure controller ports according to the connected hardware devices. The Device Library provides an extensive database of hardware devices that can be double-clicked or drag and dropped into the Device Configuration page to configure controller ports. The Device Library is discussed on the next page.

ATEN Device Library All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Property ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808H V2.2.219 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808 V1.1.106 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404H V2.2.213 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404 V1.0.062 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1616T V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808T V1.2.118 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1600 V1.3.126 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5404H V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5808H V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM6404H V1.1.108 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5404D V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5808D V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM3404H V2.0.192 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM3909H V2.0.192 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808HA V1.0.068 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM51616H V1.0.078 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM6809H V1.0.067 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808HB V1.0.073 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VP2730 1 Add To Project More device drivers

Device Library

The Device Library tab is a database of hardware devices that instantly configure controller ports. Search the library for the device connected to a controller port then add it to configure the port. For devices not in the library, use the ATEN Database Generator to create custom hardware (see page 249). Click Library on the Project bar or double-click a port on the Device Configuration page to open the ATEN Device Library.

ATEN Device Library All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Property ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808H V2.2.219 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808 V1.1.106 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404H V2.2.213 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404 V1.0.062 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1616T V2.0.194 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808T V1.2.118 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM1600 V1.3.126 TELNET ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM5404H V2.0.194 TELNET

• Add a device by clicking Add to Project or by drag & drop.
• To search for a device type keywords into the box and click
• Click a tab to filter by All, Serial, DO, IR, Relay or Ethernet.
• Click headings to sort by Brand, Device Type, Model or Version.
  ◆ Use the drop-down menu to select:

♦ ATEN Device Library – ATEN’s database of hardware devices.
- My Device Library – Devices added from the Database Generator.
- Create Device – Opens the Database Generator to create custom hardware devices for My Device Library (page 250).

Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer)

This section provides information on how to configure a control interface, the viewer, for your control system and the functions of different control objects.

Getting Started with Configuring Viewers

Step	Action Refer to
1.	Understand the usages of Pages and Subpages.	The Design Tab, page 128
2.	Plan and consider the following before creating the viewer:required control actions and suitable control elementsplacement of these control elements among Pages, and on Subpages if needed	Control Object Properties, page 145Viewer List, page 129
3.	Create a viewer. Adding Viewers, page	133
4.	Based on your planning, add the required Pages / Subpages.	Adding / Removing a Page, page 137Configuring a Subpage, page 138
5.	Add and configure control objects on the created Pages / Subpages.	Configuring Control Objects, page 142

The Design Tab

Use the Design tab to configure viewers for your control system. A design tab contains following elements to help you create, configure, and manage your viewers:

② Control / Monitor List

Viewer List Configuration Panel Library Simulator Viewer1 Page Home Page Subpage Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Mirror) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Subpage Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Mirror) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Add View Add Page Add Subpage Page Overview Duplicate Edit Preferences Page Home Page Subpage Display(Multi) Display(Multi) Display(Multi)

① Viewer List

The Viewer List provides a tree view of added Viewers and the associated control pages, as illustrated on the right.

graph TD
    A["Viewer1"] --> B["Page"]
    B --> C["Home Page"]
    B --> D["Page1"]
    E["Subpage"] --> F["Camera"]
    E --> G["Display(Matrix)"]
    E --> H["Display(Mirror)"]
    E --> I["Lighting"]
    E --> J["Projector"]
    E --> K["SubPage12"]

In a Viewer, you may find the following page types:

Home Page: This is the main page (for mobile devices and ATEN touch panel) or the key layout (for ATEN Control Pads and Keypads). A Home Page typically contains buttons that redirect to frequently used features and control pages, such as display, lighting, air conditioning, etc.

ATEN 604 Main Meeting Room 206481 Exit Discuss Present Remote Conference Scene Display Camera Light AirCon Setting

Page: This is a full-size control page to which you can redirect by tapping an associated button or icon from the Home Page or other Pages.

Subpage: A Subpage is a reduced-size control page that is embedded within a Home Page or Page through an adjustable frame (the green frame as illustrated below), called the iFrame. The advantage of using subpages is that it allows you to retain some elements of the page, such as buttons of a menu bar or a company logo, while switching among different subpages. In the example below, this page is designed to have a menu bar on the left and a reserved area (iFrame) for displaying three subpages that can be switched to by tapping the menu options on the left.

menu bar iFrame a subpage showing lighting controls COMPANY LOGO HERE Lighting Projector Display Zone On Off Time On Off Zone On Off Display On Off All On All On Prior 25 % New 25 %

Use Viewer List to add, remove, or edit Viewers and the associated pages. More specifically, you can use the Viewer List to do the following tasks:

◆ To add a new Viewer, click the Add Viewer button.
- To add a new Page or Subpage, click the corresponding button at the bottom.
- To delete, rename, or copy an added page, right-click it from the list.
- To duplicate the visual design of a control page (without its configurations), right-click it to select Copy, and right-click the target Page or Subpage category and select Paste.

• To open a control page, click the Page or Subpage from the Viewer list, the Page / Subpage appears as a separate tab in the configuration panel.
• To see a thumbnail of the added control pages within a Viewer, click a Viewer from the list. This Viewer appears as a tab in the configuration panel. For example:

Viewer1 Page Overview Duplicate Edit Preferences Page HomePage Subpage Camera Display(Multi) Display(Mirror) Display(Multi1) Display(Multi) Lighting Projector

② Monitor / Control List

The monitor / control list shows the functions and settings monitored or controlled by ATEN Unizon™, categorized by device type. For more information about remote management via ATEN Unizon™, see Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon™, page 237.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Control... Viewer ... Unizon Unizon -- Scenario -- Video Matrix Switch -- Video Switch -- Lift -- KVM Switch -- Screen -- Audio Processor -- Curtain -- Networked AV Scenario Scenario Room Add Function Item Room-1

3 Configuration Panel

The configuration panel is where the Viewer overview and control pages open in tabs for configuration.

4 Library

The Library is a repository of built-in and user-created features and functions, including graphics (page 191), flags (page 194), monitoring events (page 196), macros (page 218), schedules (page 220), and variables (page 222). For an overview of these functions, see Library, page 190.

5 Simulator

Use the Simulator button to simulate the control elements on your Viewer (without actual effect on controller-managed devices). Use the mouse to click through the page links.

Note: To view how Subpages appear, click the iFrame of the Subpage and select the Subpage you want to preview for the Preview Subpage setting. Your configuration for the selected Subpage appears.

Properties Mode Normal Name Font Arial 20 pt B r U iFrame Preview Subpage Select a sut Select a subpag Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Mirror) Display(Multi4) Lighting Projector SubPage12 Y 112 Height 1392

Adding Viewers

Deciding How Many & What Viewer to Create

Scenario 1

If you have 4 control devices in your project – one ATEN Control Pad, two ATEN Keypads (sharing identical key layout and control functions with each other, but different with the Control Pad), and an iPad, you will need to create 3 viewers, as illustrated on the right.

graph TD
    A["Keypad"] --> B["Page"]
    B --> C["Home Page"]
    D["Control Pad"] --> E["Page"]
    E --> F["Home Page"]
    G["iPad"] --> H["Page"]
    H --> I["Home Page"]
    H --> J["Page1"]
    H --> K["Subpage"]

Scenario 2

If you have 3 control devices in your project – one ATEN Control Pad and two ATEN Keypads (sharing identical key layout and control functions with each other and with the Control Pad), you will need to:

• create one viewer for Control Pad
• enable the Connect Keypad setting and specify the associated Keypads. This way, the two Keypads will share the layout and control functions specified in this Viewer.

Viewer Settings Select control device and Viewer Mobile Device Keypad Control Pad Touch Panel Model VK0200 Number of Keys 12 Keys Layout Type 1 Controller ID VK0200-ID02 Connect Keypad Keypad ID VK112EU-ID01 VK112EU-ID02 Add Keypad ATEN

Configuring a Viewer

1. In the target project file, go to the Design tab. The Viewer Settings page appears. If not, click Add Viewer from the Viewer List.

2. Select the physical device for the Viewer.

Viewer Settings Select control device and Viewer Mobile Device Keypad Control Pad Touch Panel Type iPad Resolution 2160 x 1620 Display Aspect Ratio 4:3 Done

1. Configure the settings for your selected device.

Mobile Device

Setting Description

Type Use this drop-down menu to select the mobile device that will be used to control hardware devices in a room. This sets the resolution for the Viewer to fit on the mobile device's screen.Choose a Custom selection to configure a screen size with the Resolution drop-down menu below it.Note: If you select Custom Windows Device – the Windows OS has a limitation for adding buttons to Viewers used on Windows mobile devices. See Windows OS Button Limitation, page 368, for details.

Orientation Select one of the following display orientation:◆ Landscape: A horizontal display where the width is greater than the height.◆ Portrait: A vertical display where the height is greater than the width.

Resolution Use this drop-down menu to set a custom screen resolution for the mobile device being used to control hardware devices. This option becomes available when you select one of the Custom selections from the Type drop-down menu.

Display Aspect Ratio Indicates the aspect ratio used for the selected device.

♦ Keypad

Setting Description
Model Specify the Keypad model.
Number of Keys Specify the total number of keys for your Keypad.
Layout Specify the Keypad layout. This setting should match the physical Keypad layout (see page 60 for details). Depending on the total number of keys the Keypad has, you may have 1 or multiple options for this setting.
Controller ID Select the ID number of the controller to which the Keypad will connect. This ID must match the controller ID set on the Keypad (see Hardware Overview, page 57).
Keypad ID Select the Keypad, distinguished by its ID number to match the Keypad ID set on the Keypad (see page 64). Up to 8 Keypads can connect to one controller.
blank field (after Keypad ID)	For controller to connect to the Keypad through the Keypad's IP address, make sure the controller mode setting (in the Project tab) is set to IP mode, and type the IP address of the Keypad in this field.
Add Keypad	Click Add Keypad to add one or more Keypads that will connect to the same controller and share identical key layout and control functions.

• Control Pad

Setting Description
Model Specify the	model for the Control Pad.
Number of Keys	Specify the total number of keys for your Control Pad.
Layout Specify the	layout for the Control Pad. This setting should match the physical layout (see page 60 for details). Depending on the total number of keys the Control Pad has, you may have 1 or multiple options for this setting.
Controller ID	specify the ID of the Control Pad.
Connect Keypad	Select this option if the connected Keypad(s) share identical key layout and control functions with the Control Pad.
Keypad ID Click the	drop-down menu to specify the ID of the added Keypad.
blank field(after Keypad ID)	(Optional) Type the IP address of the Keypad for the controller to identify and establish connection with. Use this feature when you have more than 16 Keypads in the project or when the network switch blocks multicast signals between the Keypad and the controller.
Add Keypad Click	this button to add Keypad that connects to this Control Pad and shares identical key layout and control functions.

◆ Touch Panel

Setting Description
Type Use this drop	-down menu to select the Touch Panel that will be used to control hardware devices in a room.
Orientation Select	one of the following display orientation:♦ Landscape: A horizontal display where the width is greater than the height.♦ Portrait: A vertical display where the height is greater than the width.
Resolution Indicates	the screen resolution of the selected Touch Panel.
Display Aspect Ratio	Indicates the aspect ratio of the selected device.

4. Click Done to save the configuration. An overview appears.

File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Viewer1 Page Overview Delete Edit Preferences Page Home Page Subpage Add Viewer Add Page Add Subpage

1. Add or remove the Pages / Subpages to your viewer as required.

Adding / Removing a Page

- To add a Page to a viewer, click from the Viewer list or from the viewer's Page Overview.

◆ To remove a Page, do any of the following.

◆ In the viewer list, right-click the Page and select Delete.

In Page Overview, click for the associated Page to be removed.

Display(Matrix) Main Menu Display A Display B Display C Main Menu

Configuring a Subpage

1. Click the target viewer from the Viewer List, and then click add one or more Subpages to the selected viewer.

to Add Subpage

1. Make sure the Page contains an iFrame for displaying Subpage controls. If not, right-click within the Page and select Add iFrame. A green frame (iFrame) appears.

Page2 X 503

1. Preview a Subpage within the iFrame.

a) Click within the iFrame. The iFrame border turns blue.

Pure geometric diagram with a rectangle and diagonal lines on a dark blue background, no text or symbols present.

b) Go to Properties > Preview Subpage, and select a Subpage that you have created. The Subpage appears in the selected iFrame.

1. Adjust the size and location of the iFrame.

2. To move the iFrame, mouse over within the iFrame and then click-and-drag the iFrame.

3. To resize the iFrame, click within the iFrame, and drag-and-drop the sides or any of the corners to resize.

4. If you have two or more Subpages sharing an iFrame, create a button for switching to each of the Subpages.

a) Right-click within the page and select Add Button.
b) Configure the button properties as required.

c) Click the button, click Link Subpage, and then double-click a Subpage from the Function column to add the action. For example:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM0808H(Serial) VS0801A(Serial) CS1944DP(Serial) RX-V659[XM](IR) Curtain(Relay) Condition Link Link SubPage Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Camera Display(Matrix) Display(Mirror) Display(Multi1) Display(Multi2) Display(Multi3) Display(Multi4) Display(Multi5) Lighting Projector SubPage12 3 Commands Link To: Camera to iFrame_1

d) Proceed to configure each button. Now the control page should contain buttons that switch to the defined Subpage.

For example:

COMPANY LOGO HERE Camera Lighting Display (matrix) Projector Display Camera Press Zoom Camera Settings

1. If you wish to keep a set of controls on the Page and only have them shown when the iFrame is closed, follow the steps below to add and configure a button for this purpose.

a) Right-click within the page and select Add Button.
b) Configure the button properties as required.
c) Click the button in the preview area, and add a Link Subpage action of any Subpage.
d) Double-click the added command and select Hide and the iFrame to be hid.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Link Link SubPage Change Button State Change Label Function Display(Multi2) Display(Multi1) Commands - Link To Hide To:iFrame_4096

Note: The iFrame ID should match the ID indicated at the top-right corner of the iFrame in the preview area.

Duplicating a Viewer

To duplicate the Viewer along with its Pages / Subpages, do the following.

1. Click the target viewer from the viewer list. The page overview appears.

2. Click . The selected viewer is duplicated.

Viewer Control Objects

Understanding Control Objects

The ATEN control system supports a wide range of control objects, such as buttons, slider bars, videos, and PowerPoint controls that you can use and customize.

Each button has a symbol in the top left corner to indicate:

◆ “A” the button’s actions are configured correctly.
♦ “!” the button’s actions need to be modified or they will not work.
- Buttons with no symbol indicate that functions have not been added to it. For details on adding functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166.

graph TD
    A["PRESENTATION"] --> B["PRODUCTION"]
    B --> C["PROJECTION"]
    C --> D["LIGHT"]
    C --> E["VIDEO WALL"]
    C --> F["BLIND"]
    C --> G["CAMERA"]

Each object is identified by an ID at the top right corner. These IDs are assigned in the order of creation. These IDs help identify a label when configuring a Change Label (page 184) or a button when configuring a Change Button State (page 183).

Configuring Control Objects

1. Use one of the following methods to open the Page you wish to configure.

2. Click the Page from the Viewer List.

3. Click its associated Viewer from the Viewer List to open the Page overview and then click to open the Page.

The Page opens in a tab. For example:

Home Page ATEN Remote PC Control with ATEN ControlAssist PC Control Apps CUSTOM

1. To add a control object, right-click any space in the Page, and select an object from the pop-up menu.

Note:

• For detailed information of each object type, see Control Object Properties, page 145.

• The Windows OS has a limitation when adding buttons to Viewer pages for use on Windows mobile devices. See Windows OS Button Limitation, page 368, for details.

• Click the added object to configure its settings and/or associated actions.

ATEN Configurator - V62.8.vkpro* File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload View3 Home Page View1 PowerPoint Properties Mode Normal Systemency Supply Image Name: Font Times New Roman 48 pt B T M Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 590 127 Size Width Height 146 145 Reset: access to this button or ATEN Control System App with a password PC Control Apps Remote PC Control with ATEN ControlAssist Button Action Device Room-1 Function Commands V62.88-D01 Delay V62.8-D01 Relay ControlAssist(LAN) DO vm(LAN) Wake on Las Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Thread Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(-HEX) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition

Element Tasks

Configuration panel

Shows a preview of the selected Page. You can also do the following on the preview panel:

• To zoom in and out on the preview, scroll the mouse wheel.
  ◆ To relocate an object, drag and drop the object.
• To layer an object, right-click the object and set the Order options.
• To group multiple objects, drag the mouse to select the objects, right-click on any of the objects and select Group.
• To align object, drag the mouse to select the objects, right-click on any of the objects and select Align.
• To set objects in perfect alignment, use the View menu options to select Show Grid and Align to Grid.

Element Tasks
Properties panel	Use the panel to configure selected object properties. For detailed information about object properties, refer to the following sections:Note: The iFrame ID should match the ID indicated at the top-right corner of the iFrame in the preview area., page 140Object Properties for ATEN Keypad / Control Pad, page 163
Library	Use Library to customize the appearance of the page and its buttons. For more information, see Library, page 125.
Button Action or Slider Bar Action	Use this panel to define the functions of each button and slider bar. For detailed information, see Button /Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166.
Advanced functions	To add additional conditions and actions to buttons, use the Flag function. For more information, see Flag, page 194.For a button to initiate a sequence of actions, create a Macro. For more information, see Macro, page 218.

Control Object Properties

Buttons

The Button properties provide options to configure the appearance of a button, and the confirmation message and progress message before carrying out the associated action.

Properties Mode Normal Appearance Dialog Message Name Font Times New Roman 48 pt B I U Style Image Normal Press Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 366 127 Size Width Height 140 140 Reset Image Size

- Alignment – Aligns a group of objects. Select multiple objects for the buttons to become available:

Properties

Mode

Use this drop-down menu to select one of the following button types.

• Normal – This is a button that stays the same when pressed.
• Toggle – for a button that switches between two images/colors to indicate the button status. This also splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 166) – to provide two commands for the button: Toggle ON and Toggle OFF.
• Press and Release – for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 166) to provide two commands for the button: Press and Release.
• Long Press for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This button continuously re-sends a command to a device as long as it is pressed, at the Interval specified (see Interval, below) and stops sending the command once the button is released.

Note: Use the Normal or Long Press option to set the image/color of the button based on its status.

◆ Appearance

Click the Appearance tab to configure the look of the button.

Note: The Appearance settings are applicable to all button modes.

However, the Appearance tab only exists for Normal and Toggle buttons to categorize different sets of settings.

• Name – (optional) type the text you want to use for the button (or slow double-click the button on the Viewer page).
• Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font type.

- Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.

- Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text for the button.

- Format – formats text to Bold, Italic or Underline for the button.

- Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the button box.

- Style – use the drop-down menu to select the style type.

- Image – Select this option from the drop-down menu and click Normal and Pressed to import an image to use as the button’s standard background and when the button is pressed.

- Color – Select this option from the drop-down menu to use color blocks for the toggle button and configure the colors for the normal and pressed status.

- Transparency – enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the button.

- Send Command Every (Long Press mode buttons only) – use the drop-down menu to select the amount of time between each command that is sent (repeatedly) to the device while the button is pressed.

- Position and Size – X and Y position the button at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the button box. Click Reset Image Size to reset the button size.

- Reset Image Size – click to reset the button size.

- Set Sync Condition – automatically synchronizes the button setting to the selected variable. To create variables, see Variables, page 222.

- Use as status indicator – This option is only applicable to toggle buttons accessed from a Windows-based Viewer. Select this option to disable the control functioning of the toggle button and use it as a status indicator, which changes its appearance as defined by the Style settings.

- Execute first (only applicable to normal-mode buttons) – Select this option for the button to automatically initiate its actions (commands) when its located page opens.

- Restrict access to this button on ATEN Control System App with a password– Limit the use of the selected button by requesting a password when the button is tapped in the Viewer. To enable this function, click this option and type the password in the box below.

Note:

- This function is only supported by the Normal and Toggle mode buttons (page 146).

- A valid password should not start or end with a space and should only contain upper-case alphabets, lower-case alphabets, numerals, and/or special characters including ()\~:-_

♦ Dialog

Click the Dialog tab to set up a confirmation message that displays in the Viewer when the button is pressed.

Note: The Dialog settings are only available for Normal and Toggle buttons.

• Confirm the associated action with the following message when the button is pressed – Click the check box to enable this feature.
  Action – Select a button action (Toggle On or Toggle Off) to display the confirmation message.

• Content drop-down list – Select one of the following for customization.

• Background – Customize the wording for the confirmation message. Type the message in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.

• OK – Customize the wording on the button for carrying out the associated action. Type in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.
• Cancel – Customize the wording on the button for canceling the associated action. Type in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.

Message

Click the Message tab to set up a progress message that displays while the associated action is being carried out.

Note: The Message settings are only available for Normal and Toggle buttons.

• Confirm the associated action with the following message when the button is pressed – Click the check box to enable this feature.
  Action – Select a button action (Toggle On or Toggle Off) for displaying the progress message.
• Content drop-down list – Select one of the following for customization.

- Background – Configure the wording for the progress message. Type the message in the Name field and optionally customize its font and style.

- Progress Bar – Configure the display duration (in seconds), font, and color of the progress indicator.

Groups

You can unify the properties of two or more control objects (buttons, slider bars, etc.) at the same time. Depending on the elements that your group of objects have, different properties will be open for configuration. Use your mouse to drag and select the objects from a page, the properties that are open for configuration appear in the Properties column.

For example, if you want to unify the text that appear on multiple buttons, drag and select these buttons and then configure their properties, as illustrated below.

Home Page Media Link Page PowerPoint to Home Page to PowerPoint to Media Properties Name Font Anail 24 pt Position & Size Position X Y 0 0 Size Width Height 40 40 Reset Image Size Group Group Radio Group

Labels

Properties Mode Normal Name Label Font Times New Roman 51 pt B I U Style Image Border/Li Width 10 Position & Size Position X Y 114 498 Size Width Height 422 105 Reset Image Size Set Sync Condition

The Label properties provide settings for the displayed text and its format.

- Alignment – Aligns a group of objects. Select multiple objects for the buttons to become available:

Properties

• Name – enter the text you want to use for the label or slow double-click the label on the Edit page.
• Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font type.
• Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.
  ◆Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text.
• Format– format text to Bold, Italic or Underline.
• Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the label box.
• Border/Line – select this option to configure the color, format, and width of the display screen border.

- Position and Size – X and Y position the label at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the label.

- Set Sync Condition – Displays the value of the selected variable in percentage or its raw form. To create variables, see Variables, page 222.

Slider Bars

Properties Mode Basic Slider Bar Name Font Arial 20 pt B T Direction Vertical Horizontal Style Foreground Color Background Color Knob Transparency 0 Value ASCII HEX Minimum 0 Maximum 10 Level 11 The change value will be averaged by calculating: (Maximum Value - Minimum Value) / Levels Position & Size Position X Y 14 14 Size Width Height 400 25 Reset Image Size Set Sync Condition

Right click on a Viewer page and select Slider Bar to add a bar. A Slider Bar can control a device, link to another page, or run a macro.

Use the Mode drop-down menu to select the type of slider bar (Basic Slider Bar or Advanced Slider Bar).

Basic Slider Bar

◆A slider bar where you enter the minimum and maximum values to calculate the range and levels on a slider bar, and then add one command to configure the Basic Slider Bar's action (See Slider Value, page 172). Choose options under Value to configure the slider bar's range.
- Direction – sets the bearing of the slider bar.
- Style – click the drop-down menus to select the Foreground Color and Background Color for the slider bar.
- Value—Sets the total number of levels for the slider bar.
- ASCII / HEX – click a radio button to select the format for the slider bar values.
- Minimum – enter the lowest level on the bar.
- Maximum – enter the highest level on the bar.
- Level – this represents the number of levels on the slider bar. You can calculate the value of each level with the formula: Maximum Value - Minimum Value / Level = Value Per Level. The Level is automatically calculated according to the Minimum and Maximum values you enter.
♦ Position and Size – depending on whether the bar is set Vertical or

Horizontal you can use either the Size: Width or Height box to enter a number to resize the length of the slider bar.

- Set Sync Condition – Automatically synchronizes the slider bar to the selected variable. To create a variable, see Variables, page 222.

Advanced Slider Bar

• A slider bar where you set the number of levels and add a command for each level in the bar (see Level, in the table, on page 166). Choose options under Value to configure the slider bar's range:
  ♦ Direction – sets the bearing of the slider bar.
• Style – click the drop-down menus to select the Foreground Color and Background Color for the slider bar.
• Value – Sets the total number of levels for the slider bar.Level – this represents the number of levels on the slider bar. For each level you must add a separate command in the Slider Bar Action – Commands list (see Level, in the table, on page 166).

PowerPoint Control and Media Control Templates

Properties Mode Normal Name Font Arial 10 pt B I U Style Image Normal Press Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 441 15 Size Width Height 216 166 Reset Image Size Select Device ControlAssist

Click a PowerPoint control template or a media control template to configure its position, size, and the PC that controls it.

• Position and Size - X and Y position the label at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the label.
• Select Device – Select the PC that stores the PowerPoint or media files using the drop-down list.

Images

The Properties for an image provide options to change and import images to the page. Images can be layered with other objects so that they can be placed as a background or as highlights for buttons (see Layering Images, page 155). You can Group, Order, Align, Make Same Size or Space Evenly from the Object menu.

Note: For imported images, make sure the file names contain English alphabets and/or numerals only.

Properties Mod Normal Name Font Arial 20 pt B I U Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 394 290 Size Width Height 304 281 Reset Image Size

-Style – shows the image selected. Click inside the box to import an image (*.png,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.bmp) to the page.
- Transparency – enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the image selected.
♦ Position and Size – X and Y position the image at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the image.
- Reset Image Size – resets the image size.

Layering Images

Images can be layered with other objects, such as labels and buttons, so that they can be placed as a background or as highlight for the page and/or other objects.

Video Call Conference Call Presentation Music Video Atmosphere Image Button Device 1 Device 2 Device 3 Device 4 Device 5 More

Videos

A video object is a control used for video preview, video assignment on managed displays, or video streaming by RTSP. For more details of each, see the corresponding section below:

♦ Video previews: See Setting Up a Video Preview Window, page 156.
♦ Video assignment: See Setting Up a Video Control Window, page 156.
♦ Video streaming: See Setting Up a Video Streaming Window, page 159.

Setting Up a Video Preview Window

You can set up video preview windows to view video sources from ONVIF-compliant cameras managed by the controller.

1. In your project file, make sure you have added ONVIF-compliant cameras as Ethernet devices in the Device Configuration list.
2. Right-click a viewer page and select Add Video.
3. Click the added video object and configure the following properties.

◆ Mode: Select ONVIF.

♦ Position & Size: Configure these settings as required.

- Select Device: Select the added ONVIF-compliant camera.

Setting Up a Video Control Window

Video control windows are objects on the Viewer which allow you to see previews of video sources (on a source object) or the assigned video sources (on a display object), and to switch video sources by tapping or dragging and dropping actions from the Viewer. Note that video control window is only applicable to ATEN networked video extenders.

For example, the following Viewer contains 8 video control objects, the top 3 are video source objects, each show a preview of its connected video source, and the bottom 5 are display objects, each showing its assigned video source.

ATEN Control System

To switch a video source on a display, tap a source object and then tap a display object. The switch takes effect immediately. Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop a source object onto a display object if you have this control action enabled.

To set up a video control object, follow the steps below.

1. In Configurator, you are advised to add at least one video transmitter as Ethernet device (to the Device Configuration list) for every 4 video control objects to use the as a gateway to obtain previews.

Important:

◆ Videos can only be transmitted via video transmitters to the controller.
◆ To ensure preview quality:

• Add at least one video transmitter (to the Device Configuration list) for every 4 video control objects. Adding more video control objects will likely reduce the refresh rate and smoothness of the preview.
• Avoid concurrent viewing from more than one user via the Control System App.
  ◆ Use the VE89 control app to preview video walls.

- To ensure stable preview delivery, it is recommended to use the windows version of the Control System App for prolonged viewing or monitoring. Prolonged viewing on iOS platforms may result in automatic termination of the process due to the platform’s protection mechanism to ensure its normal functioning.

1. Right-click a Viewer page and select Add Video.
2. Click the added object and configure its properties.

◆ Mode: Select VE89 Series.
♦ Position & Size: Configure these fields as required.
- Select Device: Select a video transmitter as the gateway for obtaining a preview of what is displayed on the specified extender (as configured for Port and ID).

Important: Only connect up to 4 control objects to one device.

• Port: Select the device type. Select Transmitter for a source object and Receiver for a display object,
  ID: Type the device ID for the specific transmitter or receiver. Allow drag-and-drop: Select this option to allow drag-and-drop controls.

4. Click the added object and configure the action.

For example:

(a) Create a variable to store the video source on a source object.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VS481A(IR) Switch-1(Relay) Switch(IO) VE8950(LAN) VE8900(LAN) B96(LAN) Macro Timer Set Variable 2 Function Switch Tx * * to Rx * Switch Rx * off * Switch VideoWall *(layout*) Switch VideoWall *(layout*) EDID Tx** Reset Tx * Reset Rx * Get Device Status Get Resource * List Blankscreen Rx **

(b) Add the switching action on a display object.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VS481A(IR) Switch-1(Relay) Switch(IO) VE8950(LAN) VE8900(LAN) B96(LAN) Macro Timer Set Variable Set Flag 2 Function Switch Tx ** to Rx* Switch Rx ^ off ^ Switch VideoWall ^ (layout*) Switch VideoWall ^ (layout*) EDID Tx** Reset Tx* Reset Rx* Get Device Status Get Resource * List Blankscreen Rx** Blankscreen VideoWall **

For more information about creating actions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166.

Note: To ensure smoothness of video transmission, prevent accessing this Viewer page from two or more devices at the same time.

Setting Up a Video Streaming Window

You can set up a window to stream video content via RTSP.

1. In your project file, make sure you have added an RTSP-compliant device and configured the Stream settings.
2. In a Viewer page, right-click in the blank space and select Add Video.
3. Click the added video object, and configure its properties as follows.

Mode: Select RTSP.
- Position & Size: (Optional) Specify the position and size as required. Alternatively, drag any of the object corners for resizing; mouse over the object to drag-and-drop it to reposition within the Viewer page.
- Select Device: Select the added Ethernet device.
- RTSP Settings

Default: Select this option to use the typical format for the RTSP URL (rtsp://username: password@ip:port). Type the RTSP URL of the device in the blank below.
- Custom: Select this option to use a different RTSP URL format. Type the URL in the blank below.

Dial Kit

A dial kit template consists of a display screen and a set of dial keys. To configure their appearance, click on the display area or a key.

Display Screen Dial Keys

Properties for Display Screen

Properties Mode Font Arial 51 pt B I U Style Image Border/Li Width 2 Position & Size Position X Y 1120 360 Size Width Height 486 117

Properties for Dial Key

Properties Mode Name Font Arial 74 pt 8 I U Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Position & Size Position X Y 1465 511 Size Width Height 141 116

- Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font for the typed text.

• Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.
• Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text for the button.
• Format – formats text to Bold, Italic or Underline for the button.
• Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the button box.

- Style – use the drop-down menu to select the style type.

Note: The image and color settings are only applicable to dial keys.

• Image – select this option to import different images for the dial key when it is pressed and not pressed (normal).
• Transparency—enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the button.
• Color – select this option to use different color blocks to indicate a pressed and a normal dial key.
• Border/Line – select this option to configure the color, format, and width of the display screen border.

- Position and Size – X and Y position the button at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the button box. Click Reset Image Size to reset the button size.

Note: If you are using the Call 📋 and End Call 🌐 dials, click the dial key to configure its action. For a detailed procedure, see Example: Configuring actions of dial keys., page 173.

Frame & Line

Use frames and lines to visually group or separate control objects in your Viewer. Click a frame or line object to configure its properties.

Frame Properties Properties Mode Name Font Times New Roman 51 pt B I U Style Image Round Corner 38 Fill Transparency Border/Li Width 10 Position & Size Position X Y 300 608 Size Width Height 422 423 Reset Image Size Line Properties Properties Mode Name Font Times New Roman 51 pt B I U Style Image Round Corner 53 Fill Transparency Border/Li Width 10 Position & Size Position X Y 499 365 Size Width Height 400 0 Reset Image Size

• Style – configure the color, format, and width of the line or border of the frame.
• Rounder corder – use the scroll bar or the number box to configure the roundness of the frame corner.
  ◆ Fill – select this option to fill the frame with the selected color.
• Position and Size – X and Y position the frame/line at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the frame/line.

Object Properties for ATEN Keypad / Control Pad

After you have added a Viewer (page 133) for your Keypad / Control, you can start configuring the Viewer. In the Viewer page, click on a button to configure its settings. The following settings appear in the Properties panel.

Properties Mode ▼ Normal Name Font Times New Roman 40 pt B I U Style Image Normal Pressed Transparency 0 Send Command After Holding 0.0 Seconds Position & Size Position X Y 404 286 Size Width Height 204 184 Reset Image Size

Mode

Use this drop-down menu to select one of the following button types.

• Normal – This is a button that stays the same when pressed.
• Toggle – for a button that switches between two images/colors to indicate the button status. This also splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 166) – to provide two commands for the button: Toggle ON and Toggle OFF.
• Press and Release – for a button that switches between two images/ colors when pressed and released. This splits the Commands list under Button Action (page 166) to provide two commands for the button: Press and Release.
• Long Press for a button that switches between two images/colors when pressed and released. This button continuously re-sends a command to a device as long as it is pressed, at the Interval specified (see Interval, below) and stops sending the command once the button is released.

Note: Use the Normal or Long Press option to set the image/color of the button based on its status.

• Name – (optional) type the text you want to use for the button (or slow double-click the button on the Viewer page).
• Font – use the drop-down menu to select the font type.

- Color – use the drop-down menu to change the color of the text.

- Size – enter a number (1-200) to set the size of the text for the button.

- Format – formats text to Bold, Italic or Underline for the button.

- Alignment – click a box to align the text Right, Center or Left; and Top, Middle or Bottom within the button box.

- Style – use the drop-down menu to select the style type.

• Image – imports an image to use as the button’s standard background and click Pressed to import an image to use when the button is pressed.
• Color – allows you to use drop-down menus to select the buttons color for Normal and Pressed.
• Transparency – enter a number (0-100) or use the slider-bar to set the transparency of the button.

- Send Command After Holding – Sets the required time for holding the button to apply the action for which the button is configured.

• Position and Size – X and Y position the button at the coordinates entered. Width and Height set the size of the button box.
• Set Sync Condition – Automatically synchronizes the button to the selected variable. To create a variable, see Variables, page 222. This option is only available for toggle buttons.

Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions

Understanding Button/Slider Bar/Dial Kit Actions

After you have added a button, slider bar, or a dial kit on your Viewer, define the actions it initiates using the Button/Slider Bar Actions panel. To access the panel, click on a button, slider bar, or dial key in the Viewer. The Button/Slider Bar Action panel appears.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) ControlAssist(LAN) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Function Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) Commands Link To: PowerPoint

The Button/Slider Bar Actions panel consists of the following elements:

Setting Description
Device Lists the added devices and the advanced functions.
Room Select the room	that contains the devices the Viewer will control. Use this drop-down menu to select rooms in the KNX system and display KNX devices. The Viewer will only upload to a controller configured with the same Room name (see Left Sidebar, page 110). Select All Rooms to allow the Viewer to control all rooms. Selecting All Rooms will upload the Viewer to all controllers.The Accessible Room defines what Devices are available to configure new Actions in Button/Slider Bar Properties (see page 166). Only Devices listed under the same Room (see page 110) as the Viewer's Accessible Room will be listed for use in Button/Slider Bar Properties.
Function Lists the supported functions for your chosen device or advanced option. Double-click a function to add it to the Command List, which shows a sequence of tasks to be executed when specified conditions are met for the button, slider bar, or dial key. For details on functions, see Functions, page 169.
Setting Description
Commands Lists the	commands that initiate when the button or dial key is pressed. Device and Advanced Option functions can be added and associated in the Commands list together. Commands initiate in the order that they are added to the list. Right-click in the Commands list to use the menu selections: Move Up, Move Down, Copy, Paste, Delete, Save as Macro, or Test Tool.
Toggle ON / Toggle OFF or Press / Release	When the Button Mode (page 146) is set to Toggle or Press and Release, the Commands list splits to set the two c commands: Toggle ON / Press – lists the commands that initiate when the button is first pressed or pressed and held. Toggle OFF / Release – lists the commands that initiate when the button is pressed a second time (Toggle), or released (Press and Release). When the button is pressed again, Toggle ON initiates and the cycle repeats.
	The Level drop-down menu appears when an Advanced Slider Bar is selected on the Viewer page. The number of levels in the drop-down menu reflect the Level set in the Advanced Slider Bar's properties (page 152). Use the drop-down menu to select a level and then add a command for each of the Advanced Slider Bar's levels (see page 172 for details).
	Use Move up to move an action up in the Commands list, or Move down to move an action down in the Commands list.
	Use Delete to remove an action from the Commands list.
	Use Save as Macro to save the commands in the Commands list as a macro.
	Use Test Tool to connect to a controller and test the action(s) in the Commands list.

You can configure a button with Device commands (On, Off, Stop, Play, etc.); as a Macro to send multiple commands to one or more devices; or as a Link to other Viewer pages. Advanced Options allow you to add conditions to the commands, as described on the next page.

Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions

To add one or more actions to a button, slider bar, or dial key, follow the steps below.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 ControlAssist(LAN) vm(LAN) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(HEX) HTTP HTTPS If Variable1 = Variable1 If Variable1 - Variable1

1. In the project file, click to select the button, slider bar, or dial key in the Viewer. The Button/Slider Bar Action panel appears.
2. In the Button/Slider Bar Action panel, select a Room.
3. Add commands.

For details on device functions and advanced functions, see Functions, page 169.

a) Click a device or an advanced option to display its supported functions.
b) Double-click a function to add it to the Commands list.
c) Repeat step 3a and 3b if you wish to initiate a sequence of actions.

1. In the Commands list, double-click the commands to configure them.

Functions

Button/slider bar functions can be understood as device functions and advanced functions.

- Device functions – These are functions that the selected controller or a device managed by the controller initiates. The supported device functions vary depending on the device you select in the Device list, as illustrated below. For details on controller functions, see Device Functions, page 171. Controller functions

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM3404H(Serial) VS461(IR) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(HEX) HTTP HTTPS

VM3404H functions

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM3404-I(Serial) VS461(IR) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Function All Output Port display native resolution for sca Echo off Echo on Implement ATEN default EDID setting Implement customized EDID mode Implement port 1 connected display's EDID Manually implement the best resolution for all c OSD off OSD on Output Port * display native resolution for scalir Read device information Reset Scaling Output Port * to 1024x768@60

- Advanced functions – These are functions that involve more than one devices in the project. Use the indicated column to select an advanced function, the available options are listed in the Function list. For details about each advanced function, see Advanced Functions, page 174.

Slider Bar Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function VK2100-ID01 VM3404H(Serial) VS461(IR) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name New Macro New Macro (1)

Device Functions

◆ Each ATEN controller supports the following functions.

- Delay – adds a delay in seconds. Enter a number between 0.1-180.

- Relay – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Relay port.

- DO – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Digital Output port.

- Wake on LAN – powers on the specified computer (MAC address) over Ethernet.

- Serial Raw (ASCII) – adds a serial command in the ASCII mode.

- Serial Raw (HEX) – adds a serial command in the HEX mode.

- Telnet Raw (ASCII) – adds a telnet command in the ASCII mode.

- TCP Raw (ASCII) – adds a TCP command in the ASCII mode.

- TCP Raw (HEX) – adds a TCP command in the HEX mode.

♦ UDP Raw (ASCII) – adds a UDP command in the ASCII mode.

◆ UDP Raw (HEX) – adds a UDP command in the HEX mode.

- HTTP – adds an HTTP command.

- HTTPS – adds an HTTPS command.

- Pronto Hex Code – adds an IR command using Pronto Hex codes.

- Value Types

When a device command has multiple values you can double-click it and use the Show Flag Menu* to select a device setting:

Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Library Value Flag Value Variables

- Library Value – use the drop-down menu to select a device setting for the command. The selection of settings in the drop-down menu can be modified using the Database Generator to edit the command string (see Editing / Adding a New Device, page 256).

Flag2 Flag Variable – clicking this button allows a Flag with a set of values to be selected for the action. The button’s action will select a setting according to the Flag value. Each value in a Flag can be set to a different device using a Set Flag (as a button to select

the device). When that (Set Flag) button is pressed, the Flag value is set for that particular device, and will be used as the setting for this action, when it's button is pressed.

Volume Variables – Select this option to use a Variable in the command. After selecting the option, a drop-down menu containing a list of the Variables that you created appear.
Slider Value Slider Value – select this option to configure a Basic Slider Bar's command. The range and change levels are automatically configured according to the minimum and maximum values set for the Basic Slider Bar. This option only appears when a Basic Slider Bar is selected on the Viewer page and you are adding Slider Bar Action commands.

Note: The Show Flag Menu allows you to use a single Flag for all devices rather than adding a Conditional Flag for each device.

- Dial Value Dial Value – select this option to use the string of values that has been dialed using the dial kit via Viewer from a mobile device.

Level 1 Level – When an Advanced Slider Bar is selected on a Viewer page, the Level drop-down menu appears above the Commands list. A command must be added to each level of an Advanced Slider Bar. To configure each level, use the drop-down menu to select a level and then add a command to it.

2 Function Set ID* Source HDMI2 Set ID* Source S-Vide Set ID* Source SDI Set ID* Source VGA Set ID* Source YPbPr Set ID* Volume * Get ID* Ambient Get ID* Audio Source 3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (6) IL420 Set ID0001 Volume 000004 Level 4 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 9 Level 10

Applications of Device Functions

Example: Configuring actions of dial keys.

Out of the 15 keys on a dial kit, only the Call and End Call keys require configuration, the actions for other keys are pre-configured to send out the number or character as indicated on the keys.

Display Screen Dial Keys

Follow the steps below to add an action to the Call key.

1. Click the Call key in the Viewer to display the Button Action panel.
2. Select a device (e.g. a video conferencing system) and double-click to add a function for the key. In this case, it should be a dialing function.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 CCS1000D(LAN) RAV 900(LAN) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Function Dail (Type*)(ID*)(number*) Dail Fill In(Type*)(ID*)(number*) Gain(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*)(Group*)(Value*) HOOK(Type*)(ID*)(ON/OFF*) Marco(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*)(*name*) Mute(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*)(Group*)(Mode*) Preset(Type*)(ID*)(Channel*) Redail(Type*)(ID*) Telnet Raw(ASCII) Commands (Telnet) on VK2100-ID01 Ethernet (2) RAV 900 D

1. Double-click the added command and select Dial Value.

3 Commands type 880 (D A) (number Dial Value) Library Value Flag Value Variables Dial Value

Advanced Functions

Use advanced options for button和社会 actions that involve a series of actions (Macro), actions that the involve page redirect (Link), or actions that involve change or update of device settings of multiple objects (Set Variable).

Note: Associate Set Flag, Condition, Change Button State, or Change Label commands with device commands in the Commands list by dragging and dropping them into a tree view list, which allows them to initiate together (see Applications of Advanced Functions, page 176).

• Macro – sends multiple commands to one or more devices. Select to add a macro command from the Function list. To create a macro, add multiple device actions to the Commands list, then click the Save as Macro icon or access the function by clicking the Library icon (page 98).

• Link – a command used on a button to:

• redirect a Viewer Page to another Page when the button is pressed, for example, a Home page button, which redirects the display to the home page.

• redirect one or more Viewers to a specified Page when the button is pressed. For example, when an Exit button is pressed, you can have all Viewers (used by touch panels and/or mobile devices in one meeting room) return to their home page.
  ◆ Configure the following fields for the command:

3 Commands - Link To Home Page Mirror in Viewer1 Myself Mirror

• Link To: Select a destination page
• Myself/Mirror: Select Myself to have the Viewer link to a selected page only on the tapped device; select Mirror to have all the devices that use the same Viewer file to return to the selected page.

For more information on configuring a button, see Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions, page 168.

- Set Variable – creates a variable to represent a device setting (e.g. speaker volume) that can be used by two or more control objects (e.g. slider bar or buttons) in the Viewer. This function is used when you have more than one Viewer objects controlling the same device.

Note: To complete this setting, go to Properties of the control objects and configure the Set Sync Conditions setting.

• Set Flag – sets a flag value to represent the new device status when a command changes a device setting. Set Flags are added to the Commands list after device commands to change the Flag (device status).
• Condition – adds one or more conditions that must be met for commands to initiate. The conditions can be based on a Variable or a feedback value (setting value sent from a managed device).
• Variable conditions— Use Variable conditions for the controller to carry out actions (commands) when the specified Variable meets the specified conditions. Use Variable If, Variable Else If, and/or Variable Else to fully cover all scenarios in your application. For example, if you want a display a warning message on the Viewer when the volume of a speaker is at its maximum (10 dB), you will need to: (a) Set up a Variable for the speaker volume; (b) Select a Variable If condition; (c) Double-click the condition to set the Variable value to 10; (d) Drag a Change Label command and nest it under the condition you selected in step (a); (e) Double-click the Change Label command to type the warning message you wish to display when the speaker volume reaches 10 db.

- Feedback conditions – Use feedback conditions for the controller to carry out actions (commands) when the specified feedback value meets the specified conditions. Use Feedback If, Feedback Else If, and/or Feedback Else to fully cover all scenarios in your application.

Note: The Else If and Else conditions can only be nested under the If conditions and can not be used on their own.

• Change Button State – this command changes the image of another button when this button is pressed – allowing the image of any other button to change when the command from this button is sent. Change Button State is added to the end of the Commands lists. When adding this to a Toggle button it allows the image to switch with the toggle behavior: Normal or Pressed. In this situation the Change Button State is added to the end of both the Toggle ON and Toggle OFF Commands lists.
• Change Label – this option changes a label’s text with text that you enter manually or with text from a device’s return message. A Manual Change Label can be added to the beginning or end and with a Condition in the Commands list. Adding it to a Condition guarantees the label only changes when the command initiates.
• Change Group Button State – this option adds a command that changes the button selected in a Radio Group (page 103). Create a Radio Group

and then a Function will be listed for it when Change Group Button State is selected. Add the Change Group Button State to the Commands list of a button and use the drop-down menu to select the button in the Radio Group you want selected.

- Change Slider Bar Level – this option adds a command that changes the level of a Slider Bar. Create a Slider Bar and then a Function will be listed for it when Change Slider Bar Level is selected. Add the Change Slider Bar Level to the Commands list of a button and use the drop-down menus to select the Slider Bar and Level to change.

- Change Button Name – this option adds a command that displays specified text on another button when this button is tapped. A typical application of this command is when you want to show the assigned source on an output device as soon as the source is switched.

- Function – lists the commands that can be added to the Commands list. Select an option under Device, then double-click or drag & drop commands from the Function list to add them to the Commands list.

Applications of Advanced Functions

Advanced Options allow you to include conditions with commands in the Commands list. Associate Set Flag, Condition, Change Button State or Change Label functions with a command in the Commands list by dragging and dropping them into a tree view listed with the command, so that they initiate in the order listed.

Set Flag

Adds a Set Flag to change a Flag's value when a command changes a device setting. This sets the Flag value to match the new device setting (e.g. ON or OFF). Always add a Set Flag to a Condition Flag, after the device action(s):

If Flag1 equal to OFF (RS232 Device) VM0808H-1 Power on detection Set Flag Flag1 to ON

To add a Set Flag:

1. Under Device, select Set Flag.

2. From the Function list, select the Flag.

3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Flag to add it to the end of the Condition Flag, in a tree view list:

Button Action Device Room-1 2 Function 2 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VMG404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Link 1 Set Flag Flag1 Flag2 Flag3 Flag4 Flag5 If Flag2 equal to OFF (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection Set Flag Flag2 to ON

1. Double-click Set Flag in the Commands list to use the drop-down menus to set the Flag and Value.

- Set Flag2 to ON

Condition

Adds a condition that must be met before the commands listed with it can initiate. When the button is pressed, the Condition's set value must equal the Flag or Feedback value for the command(s) to initiate. There are two condition types: Flag and Feedback.

- Flag – Adds a condition based on a Flag’s value. “If Flag equals Value” is true, the condition is met and the commands listed with the Condition will initiate. Always add a Condition Flag at the top of the Commands list, drag and drop the device command(s) and then a Set Flag at the end, in a tree view list:

If Flag1 equal to OFF (RS232 Device) VM0808H-1 Power on detection Set Flag Flag1 to ON

To add a Condition Flag:

1. Under Device, click Condition.

2. From the Function list, select Flag.

3. Double-click Flag to add the Condition Flag to the Commands list.

Button Action 7 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) SetFlag 1 Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function 2 Commands Flag Feedback ifFlag1 equal to OFF 3

1. Double-click the Condition Flag in the Commands list to use the dropdown menus to set the Flag and Value.

- If Flag1 equal to OFF

1. From the Function list, drag & drop device commands to add them to the Condition Flag, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Implement ATEN default EDIL Implement port 1 connected d Manually implement the best Mute all Output Port Mute Output Port * Power off detection Power on detection Reset 3 Commands If Flag1 equal to OFF (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1)

1. Add a Set Flag after the last device command in the Commands list:

If Flag1 equal to OFF (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Powe Set Flag Flag1 to ON

- Feedback – adds a condition based on the text from a serial/telnet/TCP device's return message. Always add a Condition Feedback to a serial/

telnet/TCP command, with command(s) added below the Condition Feedback, in a tree view list:

Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Data: wait 300 ms If Feedback equal to (ASCII) POD OK (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection

Receive Time – when a Feedback condition is added to a device command the wait to Receive Time drop-down menu appears allowing you to set the amount of time to wait before it stops receiving the return message from the device.

There are three Condition Feedback types:

• Equal – when the text sent from a serial/telnet/TCP device’s return message matches all of the text entered for a Condition Feedback Equals, the commands listed below it will initiate.
• Include – when the text sent from a serial/telnet/TCP device’s return message matches part of the text entered for a Condition Feedback Include, the commands listed below it will initiate.
• Bypass – this option bypasses matching text from the serial/telnet/TCP return message and initiates a Change Label command. The label’s text will change to the return message sent from the device (i.e. the Feedback Result). A Change Label must be added to the Feedback Bypass for it to work.

To add a Condition Feedback Equal/Include:

1. Under Device, click Condition.

2. From the Function list, select Feedback.

3. From the Function list, drag and drop Feedback to add it to the Serial/Telnet/TCP command, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Flag 2 Feedback 3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Sca IfFeedback equal to (ASCII)

1. Double-click If Feedback equals to in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select equal to or include and enter the Text.

- Feedback equal to ASCII

Text entered here must match all (equal to) or part (include) of the text from a serial/telnet/TCP device's return message for the command(s) to initiate. Use the ASCII / HEX drop-down menu to select the format.

1. From the Function list, drag & drop device command(s) to add them to the Feedback Equal/Include Condition, in a tree view list:

2 Function Implement ATEN default EDI Implement port 1 connected d Manually implement the best Mute all Output Port Mute Output Port * Power off detection Power on detection 3 Commands Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Data: check pod wait 3 If Feedback equal to (ASCII) pod off (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection

To add a Feedback Bypass Condition with Change Label:

1. Under Device, click Condition.

2. Select Feedback from the Function list.

3. From the Function list, drag and drop Feedback to add it to the Serial/Telnet/TCP command, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition 2 Function 3 Commands Flag 2 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port(3) VM5808H Scal Feedback If Feedback equal to (ASCII) 3

1. Double-click If Feedback equals to in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select bypass.

- Feedback bypass ASCII

1. Under Device, select Change Label.

2. From the Function list, select the Viewer Page where the label is located.

3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Viewer Page to add it to the Feedback Bypass Condition, in a tree view list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function Home Page Light 6 Video wall Signage Hybrid Sound Projector 3 Commands Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H If Feedback bypass (ASCII) Change Label Video Wall_2744 to "FEED" 7

1. Double-click Change Label in the Commands list and use the dropdown menu to select a label. Labels are identified by object IDs (see page 144).

- Change Label Video wall - Video Wall_274 to FEEDBACK_RESULT

The label's text will change to the serial/telnet/TCP device's return message.

Change Button State

This option is used to change another buttons image when this button is pressed – allowing the button image to switch depending on the status: Normal or Pressed. Change Button State is added to the end of the Commands lists and should point to a Toggle button. Adding this to a Toggle button allows the image to switch with the toggle behavior: Normal or Pressed.

To add a Change Button State:

Properties Mode Toggle Appearance Dialog Message Name Font Times New Roman 48 pt B I U Style Image Normal Pressed 0

1. Under Properties, use the Mode drop-down menu to select a button type.

2. Under Style, click the Normal and Pressed button to select an image/color* for the button's state.

Note: Use the Style drop-down menu to select Image to import an image file for the button state, or Color to choose a color format for the button state.

1. Add the Toggle ON and Toggle OFF device commands to the Commands lists.

2. Under Device, select Change Button State.

3. In the Function list, select the Viewer page.

4. Select the Toggle ON radio button, then in the Function list, double-click the Viewer page to add it to the end of the Toggle ON commands in the Commands list.
5. Select the Toggle OFF radio button, then in the Function list, double-click the Viewer page to add it to the end of the Toggle OFF commands in the Commands list.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Condition 4 Change Button State Change Label 2 Function 5 Home Page (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power on detection Change Button _2814 to Normal on Page Home Page Toggle OFF 7 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Power off detection - Change Button State Home Page - 2814 to

1. In each Commands list, double-click the Change Button State command to set the Button and State (Normal or Pressed).

Change Button State Home Page 2814 to Pressed

Change Label

Changes a label's text with text that you enter manually or with text from a serial/telnet/TCP device's return message (Feedback Result). A Change Label that uses a return message, must be added to a Feedback Bypass Condition (page 181). A Manual Change Label can be added anywhere in the Commands list. Adding it to a Condition guarantees the label changes only when the command initiates.

If Flag equal to OFF (RS232 Device) VM0808H-1 Power on detection Set Flag Flag to ON Change Label VM0808H-1 - Zone 1 Video_8197 to POD ON

To add a Manual Change Label:

1. Under Device, click Change Label.
2. In the Function list, select the Viewer page where the label is located.
3. Double-click or drag and drop the Viewer page to add the Change Label to the Commands list.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function Home Page Light Video wall Signage Hybrid Sound Projector 3 Commands 3 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0404H Pow Change Label2_22 to "" on Page Sound Condition Change Button State Change Label

1. Add a Change Label to multiple or Toggle ON / Toggle OFF Command lists to have the same label change text for different actions.

2. In the Commands list, double-click Change Label to use the drop-down menu to select a Label and input the Text. This is the text in the label that will appear when the button is pushed.

- Change Label Sound - 2_2752 to

Repeat the steps to add a Change Label for the reverse action (i.g., On and Off).

Change Group Button State

Adds a command that changes the selection in a Radio Group (see page 103). To use this function, first create a Radio Group and then add a button to the Viewer page. Add a Change Group Button State independently or with a device command:

To add a Change Group Button State:

1. Under Device, select Change Group Button State.
2. From the Function list, select the Viewer Page where the Radio Group is located.
3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Viewer Page to add it to the Commands list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VM0808H(Serial) VM0808(IR) TCPIP(LAN) TELNET1(LAN) 2 Function Video wall Hybrid Camera Projector 3 Commands Change Group Button _72 to Checked Change Label 1 Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level

1. Double-click Change Group Button in the Commands list and use the drop-down menu to select the Button.

Change Group Button Projector _72 _72 _73 _74 _75 _76

Change Slider Bar Level

Adds a command that changes the level of a Slider Bar. To use this function, first create a Slider Bar on a Viewer page. Add a Change Slider Bar Level independently or with a device command.

To add a Change Slider Bar Level:

1. Under Device, select Change Slider Bar Level.
2. From the Function list, select the Viewer Page where the Slider Bar is located.
3. From the Function list, drag and drop the Viewer Page to add it to the Commands list:

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VM0808H(Serial) VM0808(IR) TCPIP(LAN) TELNET1(LAN) 2 Function Signage Hybrid Blind Sound 3 Commands Change Slider Bar _4 to Level 1 on Page Change Label Change Group Button State 1 Change Slider Bar Level

1. Double-click Change Slider Bar in the Commands list and use the dropdown menus to select the Slider Bar and Level.

Change Slider Bar Sound _4 to Level 1

Change Button Name

The Change Button Name command is used to display specified text on a selected button when the configured button is tapped. An application of this command is indicating the assigned source for a display device on a Viewer as soon as the source is assigned. This way, you can keep track of the source that is currently showing on a particular display device.

Example:

• Indicate the currently assigned source on a display device (in the Viewer).
• Assume an environment consisting of one monitor and five sources buttons (computer, laptop, camera...etc.), as illustrated below, and that when a source button is tapped, the source will be immediately assigned to the display.

Configuration goal: To have the assigned source printing on the display button (on the Viewer page), configure each source button so that when it is tapped, the following actions (commands) initiate: (1) Display the source to the display; (2) Print the name of the assigned source onto the display device.

Viewer1 Video Wall 1 Display Signage Hybrid Video Wall 2 Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name Function Home Page Light Video Wall Signage Hybrid Blind Camera Audio Projector 4 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Change Button Name _26 to "PC" on Page Video Wall 5

1. Click a source button to display the Button Action panel.
2. In the Button Action panel, select Change Button Name.
3. From the Function list, double-click the Viewer page where the source button is located. In this example, double-click the Video Wall option. The Change Button Name command is added.
4. From the Commands list, double-click the Change Button Name command and configure the following.

- Select the ID of the display button to indicate the location of print the text. In this example, it is the video wall's ID.

- Type the text you wish to show when the source button is tapped. In this example, enter “PC”.

1. Follow steps 1 to 4 to configure each of the source buttons.

Library

The Library icon on the Project bar offers the following functions. The table below provides an overview of each function.

Button Minimalist

Control Description
	Graphic Library	Find graphic templates such as backgrounds, buttons, device icons, and control interfaces for your viewer. For details, see Graphic Library, page 191.
	Flag Flags are created to include parameters when settings are changed to indicate the current status. For details, see Flag, page 194.
	Monitor Monitors allow you to set Conditions for Digital Input (dry contact) and Digital Input (VDC) signals and Flags on a port that will initiate an Action. In addition, you can create Listen to port and Query port monitors which check a device's status to initiate actions. For details, see Monitor, page 196.
	Macro Macros initiate a sequence of actions on one or more hardware devices. For details, see Macro, page 218.
	Schedule	Click to create scheduled events. For details, see Scheduled Events, page 220.

Control Description
	Variables Creates a Variable for a device setting (e.g. volume) that is controlled by two or more objects (e.g. slider bar or buttons) on the Viewer. When the device setting is changed through one of the objects, its setting is automatically synced and reflected on all the objects. For details, see Variables, page 222.
	Timer A timer event is a device action that initiates as soon as the defined countdown time is up. The advantage of using a timer event, as opposed to a combination of delay command and device command, is that it saves time by executing the defined action while other actions (commands) within the series execute. For more details, see Timers, page 231.

Graphic Library

The Library icon on the Project bar provides a Graphics tab and dropdown menus with ready-to-use graphics for backgrounds, buttons, icons and device interfaces. Device Interface provides entire page layouts that you can use as templates for different types of devices. Double-click or drag and drop graphics to add them to the page. Images can be imported for icons and buttons in various formats (*.png,*.jpg,*.jpeg,*.bmp).

Button

Button Minimalist

Background

Background Minimalist

Image (Device Icon)

Image Minimalist

Device Interface

Device Interface Minimalist Audio Processor Video Conference Audio Conference Video Matrix TV Switch

Flag

Flags are created for control buttons to include parameters for when settings are changed or requests are made to change settings on a device. Flags indicate what the status is and what action to take according to the value. Flags are added as actions to Button Properties as a Condition or Set Flag value.

Conditions tell a button to initiate associated actions if the flag value is true: "If Flag equals Value" initiate the action. Actions are associated with a condition so that they only initiate if the flag value is correct. That way an ON command is only sent to a device if the current flag value is OFF.

Set Flag changes the flag value when a device setting has changed. So that if a device is OFF and the action turns the device ON, adding a “Set Flag 1 to ON” will change the flag value to ON. Now the flag’s value matches the device status so that actions associated with flag Conditions will initiate accordingly.

Create flags for a device and add them as a Condition and Set Flag value in the Action – Button Properties (see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166).

To create a Flag:

1. Select Flag and click + Create New . The New Flag menu appears.

New Flag Name ON/OFF Default Value OFF 0 - 10 ASCII OK Cancel

1. Enter a Name and select a radio button to set the flag value.

2. Select On/Off and use the drop-down menu to select the Default Value.

3. Enter a range (1-100) for the values in the two boxes and use the drop-down menu to select the Default Value. Use the drop-down menu to select the format ASCII or HEX.

4. Click to create more flags or double-click a flag to edit it. The flags will appear in the list, as shown below.

Create New Name Value Default Flag1 OFF, ON OFF Flag2 0 - 10 (ASCII) 0 Flag3 32 - 4B (HEX) 32 Flag4 0 - 10 (ASCII) 5

• Name – Lists the Flag names which have been created.
• Value – Lists the flag's values or range of values.
• Default – Lists the flag’s default value.

• X – Deletes a flag from the list.

• Select Condition or Set Flag to add flags as a command in Button Action by selecting a button on a Viewer page (see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166).

Monitor

Understanding Monitor

A Monitor allows you to set conditions on a port using Digital Input (VDC) and Digital Input (Dry Contact) signals, return messages, and Flags. When the condition is met, the controller will initiate the desired action. Digital Input (VDC) hardware devices provide voltage signals between 1 and 24. Digital Input (Dry Contact) hardware devices provide open and closed circuit signals. Hardware devices with return messages can be monitored using Listen to port or Query port conditions via text they transmit. These signals provide indicators from sensors or switches of an event. An event can be the temperature, power, dry contact, sensor, switch status, or message from a device. There are two parts to a monitor, the Condition and Action.

Monitor Page Options

There different types of monitors you can create to fulfill different scenarios. A monitor (as illustrated below) contain the following configuration fields:

Monitor If New Monitor 0.1 sec Type Name Query Frequency Condition Satisfy All Conditions 1 Device VK0200-ID03 2 Status 3 Condition Listen to port Query port Flag ID Input Variable VK0200-ID03(Serial Port 1) VK0200-ID03(Serial Port 2) VK0200-ID03(TCP Server) Action 1 Device Room-3 2 Function 3 Commands VK0200-ID03 Macro Timer Set Variable Delay Relay Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

Control Description
Type Use this drop	-down list to select a monitor type:If – select this option for a single condition monitor. “If” the single condition is met, the action initiates. For details, see Creating an If Monitor, page 202.Switch– select this option for multiple conditions that use more than one “If” conditions for the monitor. In this type, if one of the conditions is met, the monitor will initiate the action. For details, see Creating a Switch Monitor, page 205.Bypass– select this option to transmit device feedback message to the selected variable actively listening for a message or by receiving a return message from the specified devices. For details, see Creating a Bypass Monitor, page 209.While Loop– select this option to execute the specified actions at the defined frequency (Query Frequency). For details, see Creating a While Loop Monitor, page 211.Professional– select this option to create variables and load values into these variables using programming script. For details, see Creating a Professional Monitor, page 212.
Name Enter a name	for the monitor.
Query Frequency	Use this drop-down menu to select how frequently the monitor checks a device for a signal.
Condition Use this	section to add one or more conditions that will need to be met for the Action to initiate. You can create up to 32 conditions for each monitor. For details, see Condition Types, page 198.
Action Use this section	to create the commands that will initiate when the monitor's conditions are met. For details, see Device Functions, page 171 and Advanced Functions, page 174.
	Click to hide or display the Device and Status/Function columns in the Condition and Action lists so that you can see a complete row of Conditions/Commands.
	Click to move an selected command up or down in the Commands list.
[GS6H]	Click to remove an selected command from the Commands list.

Condition Types

Note that you can create up to 32 conditions for each monitor.

- Listen to port / Query port

- (Query port only) Click F(x) to open the drop-down menu to select a device command to send out; or enter a command string; and then the click Edit Return Message icon and do as explained below.

Query Port (3) VM5808H F(x) - ASCII VK2100-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 1024x768@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1080p@50 Scaling Output Port * to 1080p@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1280x1024@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1280x800@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1400x1050@60 Scaling Output Port * to 1600x1200@60

- Edit Return Message

(Listen to port / Query port) Next configure the parameters for the return message from the device. This message must match for the condition to be met. In the Condition list double-click the command and then click to open the Edit Return Message window:

Edit Return Message VK2100-ID01 Listen to Port (1) VM0404H Return Message Select character(s) within the return message Select string with fixed length String Apply Equal to OK Cancel

Use the drop-down menu and enter a string of that will represent the characters in a return message from the serial device:

- Select string with fixed length

Reset S t r i n g o f C h a r a c t e r s

Use this to set a string of characters that are set within a fixed parameter. Enter a string of characters and use the S to set the start of the string and E to set the end and then click Apply. The return message will need to fit the fixed string of characters set in the text box next to the Drop-Down Menu (see next page) for the monitor to be triggered.

- Select string with a non-fixed length

Reset S t r i n g o f C h a r a c t e r s

Use this to set a string of characters where the parameters are variable. Enter a string of characters and use the S to set the start of the string and E to set the end and then click Apply. The return message will need to fit the fixed string of characters set in the text box next to the Drop-Down Menu (see below) for the monitor to be triggered.

- Drop-Down Menu

Equal to Equal to Not equal to Include Exclude

Above, enter characters that the Select string with fixed length or Select string with non-fixed length string must match and how they must be matched: Equal to, Not equal to, Include, or Exclude for the condition to be triggered.

- Flag

Creates a flag condition for the monitor. Use the drop-down menus to set a format (how the flag value must be matched) and the flag value for the condition to be triggered.

Flag Flag3 = 32

I/O Input

Create a trigger signal from a device according to the voltage. Only device with a Digital Input (dry contract) or Digital Input (VDC) port appear in the Status list. Double-click a device in the Status list to add it to the

Condition list. Double-click the command in the Condition list to configure the setting:

IO Input High on VDC Port (2) VK2100-ID01

The High or Low status tells the Monitor to initiate an Action when the device signal is above or below the threshold setting* for the port:

Digital Input (VDC)

• High - states that when the voltage signal is above the Upper Threshold to initiate the Action.
• Low - states that when the voltage signal is below the Lower Threshold to initiate the Action.

Digital Input (Dry Contact)

According to an open or closed circuit status for the port:

• Open - states that when the circuit is Open to initiate the Action.
  ◆ Closed - states that when the circuit is Closed to initiate the Action.

Functions

• Delay – adds a delay in seconds. Enter a number between 0.1-180.
• Relay – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Relay port.
• DO – adds an Open, Close, Toggle or Pulse action on the selected controller and Digital Output port.
• Wake on LAN – powers on the specified computer (MAC address) over Ethernet.
• Serial Raw (ASCII) – adds a serial command in the ASCII mode.
• Serial Raw (HEX) – adds a serial command in the HEX mode.
• Telnet Raw (ASCII) – adds a telnet command in the ASCII mode.
• TCP Raw (ASCII) – adds a TCP command in the ASCII mode.
• TCP Raw (HEX) – adds a TCP command in the HEX mode.
• UDP Raw (ASCII) – adds a UDP command in the ASCII mode.
• UDP Raw (HEX) – adds a UDP command in the HEX mode.
• HTTP – adds an HTTP command.
• HTTPS – adds an HTTPS command.
• TCP Feedback Raw (ASCII) – adds a feedback in ASCII format to having received a monitored input from a TCP client device.
• TCP Feedback Raw (HEX) – adds a feedback in HEX format to having received a monitored input from a TCP client device.

Creating an If Monitor

To create a monitor for a device port with a Condition that initiates an Action, do the following.

1. In the Design tab, click Library 📄 and click Monitor 📷.

2. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

1. Click

1. Select If from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.
2. Use the drop-down menu to set the Query Frequency.
3. Select All Conditions or Any Conditions.

Monitor If New Monitor 0.1 sec Type Name Query Frequency Condition Satisfy All Conditions 1 Device VK2100-ID0* 2 Status 3 Condition Listen to port Query port Flag IO Input Variable VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 1) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 2) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 3) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 4) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 5) VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 6) KE6900(LAN) VK2100-ID01(TCP Server) Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 KE6900(LAN) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII)

These options are only for advanced setups that require multiple events from hardware devices connected to multiple conditions. Most devices only require one signal Status added to the Condition List to initiate an Action. Most installations will not need to use this option, therefore it can be ignored.

• All Conditions: Add multiple conditions – all of which must be met for the Action to initiate.

• Any Conditions: Add multiple conditions – one of which must be met for the Action to initiate.

• Under Device, select a Controller from the drop-down menu, and then choose one of the following monitor types. For details, see Condition Types, page 198.

• Listen to port – to create a monitor that actively listens for a message from the device. Under Status, double-click a device port to add it to the Condition list.

• Query port – to create a monitor that sends out a command to the device until a feedback message is received from the device.
• Flag – to create a flag condition for the monitor.

• I/O Input – to create a trigger signal from a device according to the voltage.

• Under Status, double-click to add a device port or flag to the Condition list. Then double-click the device port or flag in the Condition list to configure the condition settings.

Note: To set the controller as a TCP server, use the TCP Server option in the Status column, and make sure to type a TCP server port in the controller's properties settings (page 116).

1. (Optional) Use the Operator option to add additional High or Low conditions (see step 4, page 203).

2. Go to the Action section at the bottom of the page to select the hardware Device and add the Function to the Commands list, as explain in the steps that follow.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State 2 Function Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) 3 Commands

Note: For more information about Functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166.

a) First select the hardware under Devices.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Delay Relay DD Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

b) Under Function, double-click a command to add it to the Commands list. This Command initiates when the Condition is met. For details on Functions and Commands, see Device Functions, page 171 and Advanced Functions, page 174.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 100 VK224-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 100 VM0404H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 100 VM5808H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 120 Macro Scaling Output Port * to 120 Set Flag Scaling Output Port * to 140 Condition Scaling Output Port * to 160 Change Button State Scaling Output Port * to 160 Scaling Output Port * to 190 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Scaling Output Port 01 to 1400x1050

Note: If you have configured the controller as a TCP server, add TCP Feedback Raw (ASCII) or TCP Feedback Raw (HEX) command to provide feedback to the TCP client.

Creating a Switch Monitor

1. In the Design tab, click Library 📄 and click Monitor 📄.
2. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

1. Click

1. Select Switch from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.
2. Use the drop-down menu to set the Query Frequency.
3. Use the options to create multiple condition comparisons, as explained below.

Monitor Switch New Monitor 88 100 ms Type Name Query Frequency VK2100-ID01 Query port VK2100-ID01(Serial Port 5) VK2100-ID01 Query Serial Port (5) Message Case 1 When�Message Equal to Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) 1(Serial) VM0808(IR) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

Control Description
Type Use the drop-down menu to select:If – select this option for a single condition comparison monitor.Switch– select this option for multi-condition comparisons that use multiple “If” comparisons for the command.
Name Enter a unique name for the monitor.
Query Frequency Use this drop-down menu to select how frequently the monitor checks a device for a signal. Options are: 100 ms - 1 second.
Drop-Down Menus Under the Type drop-down menu are four addition drop-down menus used to configure the Switch Condition:Controller– use the first drop-down to menu select the controller for a Switch condition.Listen to port / Query port– use the second drop-down menu to select the condition type for a Switch condition (see step 4, page 203 for details).Serial Device PortUse the third drop-down menu to select a serial device port and configure Edit Return Message (to configure, see Edit Return Message, page 198).To set the controller as a TCP server, use the TCP Server option in the Status column, and make sure to type a TCP server port in the controller’s properties settings (page 116).Case– use the fourth drop-down menu to add cases by selecting Add More Cases for comparison that need to be met before monitor’s condition will initiate. In the left text box enter a name for the Case, in the right text box enter the character string that the return message should match.
Action	Use this section to create commands for the monitor. See Button /Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166, for details on configuring commands.
	Click this icon to switch to the Action list view so that you can see a complete row of the command’s functions. This is a toggle button.
x Closes the Monitor window.

1. Go to the Action section at the bottom of the page to select the hardware Device and add the Function to the Commands list, as explain in the steps that follow.

Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State 2 Function Delay Relay DD Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) 3 Commands

Note: For more information about Functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166.

1. First select the hardware under Devices.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

1. Under Function, double-click a command to add it to the Commands list. This is the Command that initiates when the Condition is met. For details on what each function does, see Device Functions, page 171 and Advanced Functions, page 174.

Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 100 VK224-ID01 Scaling Output Port * to 100 VM0404H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 100 VM5800H(Serial) Scaling Output Port * to 120 Macro Scaling Output Port * to 120 Set Flag Scaling Output Port * to 140 Condition Scaling Output Port * to 160 Change Button State Scaling Output Port * to 190 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5800H Scaling Output Port 01 to 1400x10506

Note: If you have configured the controller as a TCP server, add TCP Feedback Raw (ASCII) or TCP Feedback Raw (HEX) command to provide feedback to the TCP client.

1. You can also add a Macro, Link, Set Flag or Monitor's Condition.
2. After adding all the functions to the Commands list, the Switch monitor is complete.

Creating a Bypass Monitor

Follow the steps below to create a bypass monitor.

Monitor Bypass audioMonitor Type Name 0.1 sec Query Frequency VK2100-IDC Listen to port 840T-1(Serial Port 3) VK2100-ID01 Listen to 840T-1 Port (3) Message Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 AUDIO 840T-1(Serial) minitor2(Serial) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State AudiO audio2 Set AUDIO to Bypass Library Value Bypass Value

1. In the Design tab, click Library 📄 and click Monitor 📷.

2. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

1. Click

1. Select Bypass from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.

2. Configure the following settings.

3. Query frequency: sets how frequently the monitor checks the device for a signal. Valid values range from 100 ms to 1 second.
   In the second drop-down list, select one of the following:

- Listen to port: actively listens for a message from the specified device.

- Query port: when a setting is changed on the specified device, the device sends a feedback message to the controller, informing the latest setting.

In the last drop-down list, select the port or the device to be monitored.

1. Configure the actions.

a) Select Set Variable.

b) Double-click the variable you wish to update when controller detects a change for the specified device setting.

c) For a variable, double-click the command and select Bypass.

3 Commands - Set AUDIO to Bypass

Creating a While Loop Monitor

Follow the steps below to create a while loop monitor.

Monitor While Loop Video Rotate Type Name 30.0 sec Query Frequency Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) VM5808H-1(LAN) ControlAssist(LAN) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button State Change Slider Bar Level Change Button Name Scaling all Output Port to Scaling all Output Port to Scaling all Output Port to Setup 115200 baud rate Setup 19200 baud rate Setup 38400 baud rate Setup 9600 baud rate Setup High Fan speed Setup Low Fan speed Setup Standard Fan spe Show input * alert with hig Show input * alert with hig Switch Input Port * to Outp Switch Input Port * to all O Switch Output Port * to Ne Switch Output Port * to Pr Switch all Output Port to N Switch all Output Port to P Turn off Output Port * Turn off Output Port * CEC (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Delay 10.0 Sec on VK2100-ID01 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 02 to Output Port 01 Delay 10.0 Sec on VK2100-ID01 (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) VM5808H Switch Input Port 03 to Output Port 01 Delay 10.0 Sec on VK2100-ID01

1. In the Design tab, click Library and click Monitor.
2. Select a controller to which you want to create the monitor.

VK0200-ID03

1. Click

1. Select While Loop from the drop-down menu and enter a name for the monitor.
2. Use the Query Frequency drop-down menu to define the frequency at which the device checks for signals.
3. From the Device list, select a device.

4. (Optional) Select an advanced option. For details, see Advanced Functions, page 174.

5. Double-click a function to added it to the Commands list. For details, see Device Functions, page 171 and Advanced Functions, page 174.

6. Configure the added commands if required.

Creating a Professional Monitor

Example: Keep track of the assigned sources by indicating the input port number of the assigned source on each of the four screens on a Viewer page, as illustrated below.

Home Page Output 1 Output 2 01 01 Output 3 Output 4

For the controller to print the port number of the assigned source on each screen and keep this information up-to-date, the controller needs to:

• constantly keep track of the assigned source
• constantly print the port number on each screen icon

Follow the steps below to create a professional monitor.

Monitor Professional VMRead 0.1 sec Type Name Query Frequency Condition Trigger Mode and 1 Device VK2100-ID0: 2 Status 3 Condition Listen to port Query port Flag IO Input Variable VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 1) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 2) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 3) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 4) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 5) VK2100-ID07(Serial Port 6) VM6404H(LAN) VK2100-ID07 Query Ethernet (1) VM6404H Action VMRead Edit 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID07 VM6404H(LAN) Macro Set Variable Set Flag Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCPB - 113398 Change Button Name 01_2 to InputNToOutput1 on Page Home Page (ASCII) Change Button Name 01_3 to "InputNToOutput2" on Page Home Page Change Button Name 01_4 to "InputNToOutput3" on Page Home Page Change Button Name 01_5 to "InputNToOutput4" on Page Home Page

1. In the Design tab, click Library 📄 and click Monitor 📷.
2. Click to create a new monitor.
3. Configure the following settings.

◆ From the Type drop-down menu, select Professional.
- Name the monitor.
♦ Define the query frequency.

1. Configure the condition settings.

In this example, the controller VK2100 is set to query the input and output ports of the Matrix Switch, VM6404H, that connects to the controller every 0.1 second.

• Add the condition(s) that must be met for initiating actions. For details on conditions, see Condition Types, page 198.
• Select a Trigger Mode for the added conditions.

- And: Only initiate the added actions (commands) if the values of all specified inputs change.

• Or: Initiate the added actions (commands) if the value of any specified input changes.
• Independent: Use this option when you have multiple sets of actions. The added actions (commands) initiate if the corresponding set of inputs change in value.
• Always: Initiate the added actions (commands) at the specified frequency.

5. Configure the Action settings.

a) Click Edit to script the codes.

Note:

• This editor follows Lua’s programming rules. ATEN suggests using Notepad++ to script the codes before adding them to the Editor.
• For details on built-in commands, see Built-in Commands, page 215.
• When scripting codes for I/O inputs, use lower case “l” to represent the close status (e.g. input_io == ‘l’), and “h” to represent open status (e.g. input_io == ‘h’).

In this example, use Script Editor to:

♦ Convert data format.
- Create four variables representing the assigned input for each screen. In this example, InputNToOutput1, InputNToOutput2, InputNToOutput3, and InputNToOutput4 are created.
- Load the input number of the assigned source to the created variables.

Below is sample of the scripts used for this scenario:

function vk_parser(input)
    local vminput = vk_hex_toascii(input)
    -- local vminput = input
    if vminput == nil or vminput == "" then
    return
end

local map = {}
for vmout, vmin in string.gmatch(vminput, "o([0-9]*)i([0-9]*) video [^ ]* audio [^ ] * [^\n]** ) do
    map[vmout] = vmin
end

local vk_var_1_InputNToOutput1 = map["01"]
local vk_var_2_InputNToOutput2 = map["02"]
local vk_var_3_InputNToOutput3 = map["03"]
local vk_var_4_InputNToOutput4 = map["04"]

vk_doc commands_1_VMRead(vk_var_1_InputNToOutput1, vk_var_2_InputNToOutput2, vk_var_3_InputNToOutput3, vk_var_4_InputNToOutput4) end 

b) Add actions.

In this example, add four Change Button Name commands:

Change Button Name SyncVM Home Page 01_2 to output InputNToOutput1 ASCII 

For details, see Device Functions, page 171 and Advanced Functions, page 174.

Built-in Commands

Command Description

jsonobj Converts JSON strings to tables.

vk_ascii_to_hex Converts strings from ASCII to Hex.

vk_doc commands_ID_name Defines the commands to be executed, e.g., vk_doc commands_1_output. A the user should define his/her own commands and their corresponding IDs. As long as the ID does not change, the command name can change.The same ID cannot be used for two different commands. The same applies to command names.

vk_hex_to_ascii Converts strings from Hex to ASCII.

Command Description
vk_parser(input1, input2)	◆ Use this command to indicate a start to a set of scripts.◆ The brackets should contain equal number of inputs that you added in the Professional Monitor setup.◆ If the Trigger Mode is set to independent, the script should contain only one input, but the number of parsers should match the number of inputs added to the Monitor, e.g. vk_parser_1(input), vk_parser_2(input).
vk_var_ID_name Create a variable.

Duplicating a Created Monitor

To duplicate a created monitor to another controller, right-click a monitor, mouse over Duplicate, and then select a target controller.

VK0200-ID03 Create New Import from DBG Name Audio Input Output New Monitor New Monitor (1) Duplicate VK2200-ID01 VK1200-ID02 VK0200-ID03

Macro

Macros allow you to create a button that will initiate a sequence of actions across the same or different hardware devices. This saves time by allowing multiple devices to initiate actions all at once from one button. For example, you can create a macro to start a video presentation by adding functions to: dim lights, power on source, power on display, lower screen and play source. You can also add time delays between actions in a macro. Each project can store up to 104 macros.

When you click opens:

from the Library's Macro tab, the window

Macro New Macro Name Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2500-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Macro Timer Set Variable Set Flag Condition Link Link SubPage Change Button State Change Label Change Group Button St Delay Relay DO Wake on Lan Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX) UDP Raw(ASCII) UDP Raw(HEX) HTTP HTTPS

To create a macro:

1. Select Macro and click .

1. Enter a Name and select a Viewer from the drop-down menu, then click OK.
2. Go to the Actions section at the bottom of the page to select hardware under Device and add the Function to the Commands list:

Macro New Macro Name Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK224-ID01 VM0404H(Serial) VM5808H(Serial) 1(Serial) VM0808(IR) Macro Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label 2 Function 3 Commands Delay Relay DO Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(HEX) Telnet Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(ASCII) TCP Raw(HEX)

Note: For more information about adding Functions, see Button / Slider Bar / Dial Kit Actions, page 166.

1. After adding all the functions to the Commands list, the macro is complete.
2. In Create Viewer & Design, create a button and add a macro to the Button Action properties (see page 166) by selecting Macro under Devices (see Device Functions, page 171 for details).

Scheduled Events

You can have one or a series of tasks execute recurringly on specified time of the day. Each project can store up to 60 scheduled events. Note that this feature is not applicable to Control Pads.

Creating a Scheduled Event

1. In the Design tab, click Library and click Schedule

2. Select a controller to which you wish to create an event.

VK1200-ID02 + Create New

1. Click . A new event window appears.
2. Name the event.
3. Click to specify a recurring schedule for the event.
4. Configure event actions.

a) In the Device column, select a device.
b) In the Function column, double-click the desired functions. The corresponding commands appear in the Commands column. For details on what each function does, see Device Functions, page 171.
c) In the Commands column, double-click each command to configure the settings.

1. Optionally add system functions. For detailed information, see Applications of Advanced Functions, page 176.

2. These commands will initiate in the listed order. To change the order of the commands, click .

Duplicating a Scheduled Event

To duplicate a created event to another controller, right-click an event from the event list, mouse over Duplicate, and then select a target controller.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name New Event Duplicate VK2200-ID01 VK1200-ID02 VK0200-ID03

Variables

Understanding Variables

A Variable is a value holder that stores a single device setting (e.g. speaker volume) and can be assigned to multiple control objects (e.g. a slider button, a maximum volume button, and a minimum volume button). This way, when a device setting is adjusted via a Viewer object, the new setting will be loaded into this Variable and then reflected to all Viewer objects that use this Variable. Each project can store up to 128 Variables.

Below is a Variable list that has two variables created, temperature and speaker volume, for devices controlled by VK1200-ID02.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

This feature is useful for automatic synchronization of device settings, especially when you have two or more objects in a Viewer controlling a single device setting. Take the example of controlling a speaker volume on a Viewer. On your Viewer, you may have a slider bar which you use to adjust the volume, a button that sets the speaker to its maximum volume, and another button for minimum volume. When you tap the maximum volume button, you would like the following status changes reflected on the Viewer:

◆ The maximum volume button shows a toggle-on status
- The minimum volume button synchronized with this setting and shows a toggle-off status
- The slider bar synchronizes with this setting and moves to its highest volume

Creating a Variable for Devices that Return Feedback Messages

Follow the steps below to configure a Variable if the Variable (device setting) is for a device that returns feedback messages to the controller.

1. Create a Variable for the device setting (e.g. speaker volume).

a) In the Design tab, click Library.

b) In the pop-up window, click the Variable (●) icon.

c) Using the indicated drop-down list, select the controller which controls the target device. The variables created for the devices managed by the selected controller are listed.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

d) Click . A Variable setup page appears.

e) In the setup page, configure the following settings.

◆ Name: Type a name for the Variable.
- String format: Select the string format for the target device.
Setting range: Type two numbers to define the range for the variable. Valid numbers include negative numbers and numbers that contain one decimal place.

Note: If one of the numbers contains a decimal place (e.g. -5.0), make sure to specify the other number in the same format (e.g. 10.0).

- Unicode: (Only available for string variables) Select this setting for multilingual text to be encoded and represented correctly in the variable.

◆ Default value: Type a default for the setting.

◆ Description: Optionally add additional information for the variable.

Your settings may look like this:

Synced Variables Create a synced variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A synced variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name AUDIO ASCII 0 ~ 10 Default Value 5

1. Configure control objects for the Viewer. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 127.

a) In the Design tab, add control objects to your Viewer.

Note: The Variable function is only applicable to toggle buttons, basic-mode slider bars, and radio groups of normal buttons. Configure the Mode setting before you proceed.

Properties Mode Basic Slider Bar Name Font Arial

b) For a slider bar object, click it in the Viewer page and configure the Value settings in Properties.
c) In Properties, click Set Sync Condition and select the variable you created using the drop-down list.

Edit Sync Condition Sync slider bar with the specified variable when AUDIO None AUDIO Create Variable ≥ 0 and ≤ 10 Remove Condition Show More

1. Create a Monitor to set up the conditions for which the device sends its latest setting to the variable. For detailed steps, see Creating a Bypass Monitor, page 209.

Creating a Variable for Devices that Do Not Return Feedback Messages

Follow the steps below to configure a Variable if the Variable (device setting) is for a device that does not return feedback messages to the controller.

1. Create a Variable for the device setting (e.g. speaker volume).

Syncod Variables Create a synced variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A synced variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name AUDIO ASCII 0 ~ 10 Default Value 5 Execute commands with no conditions Execute commands with the specified conditions Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 840T-1(Serial) minitor2(Serial) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Change Button State Change Label m1 0db vol test* m1 10db m1 -10db m1 5db m1 vol+1 m1 vol-1 m1-5db vol* vool** Serial Raw(ASCII) Serial Raw(-IEX) (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) 840T-1 volVariableValue

a) In the Design tab, click Library.
b) Click the Variable (●) icon.
c) Using the indicated drop-down list, select the controller which controls the target device. The variables created for the devices managed by the selected controller are listed.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

d) Click . A Variable setup page appears.
e) In the Setup page, configure the following settings.

• Name: Type a name for the Variable.
• String format: Select the string format for the target device.
  Setting range: Type two numbers to define the range for the variable. Valid numbers include negative numbers and numbers that contain one decimal place.

Note: If one of the numbers contains a decimal place (e.g. -5.0), make sure to specify the other number in the same format (e.g. 10.0).

- Unicode: (Only available for string variables) Select this setting for multilingual text to be encoded and represented correctly in the variable.

Note: This feature is only effective if the target controller uses firmware v3.6 or later.

• Default value: Type a default for the setting.
  ◆ Description: Optionally add additional information for the variable.

• Select a command execution type.

• Execute commands with no conditions: Execute the command (action) when the value of the specified Variable changes.

• Execute commands with the specified conditions: Execute the corresponding command (action) when the value of the Variable matches.

• Configure control objects for the Viewer.

a) Add a control object to the Viewer. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 127.
Note: Make sure to configure the mode setting before proceeding to the next step.
b) For a slider bar, click it and configure value settings in Properties.
c) Click Set Variable, and then double-click the Variable you created in step 1.
d) In Properties, click Set Sync Condition and select the Variable you created using the drop-down list.

Edit Sync Condition Sync slider bar with the specified variable when AUDIO None AUDIO Create Variable 0 and 10 Remove Condition Show More

1. Repeat steps (a) to (d) with each of the objects. If you select Execute commands with the specified conditions, follow the steps below to add commands.

a) Refer to step 4 to first configure the control objects.

b) Click Library, click the Variable (●) icon, and then click the Variable you created in step 1.

c) Click the drop-down list below the Execute commands with the specified conditions option and select a condition.

d) Add an action (command) when this condition is met. Select a device, double-click a desired function, and then double-click the command to configure the setting.

In the case of speaker volume, when the volume changes to 0 (i.e. the condition is Variable = 0), the action will be “to change the speaker volume to 0”, as illustrated below.

Synced Variables Create a synced variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A synced variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name AUDIO ASCII 0 10 Default Value 5 Execute commands with no conditions Execute commands with the specified conditions Variable = 0 Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2100-ID01 840T-1(Serial) monitor2(Serial) Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag m1 0db vol test* m1 10db m1 -10db m1 5db m1 vol+1 m1 vol-1 m1-5db vol* vool* Serial Raw(ASCII) (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) 840T-1 vol0

e) Repeat steps 2(c) and 2(d) to add one or more actions to each condition.

1. If you select Execute commands with no conditions, follow the steps below to add commands.

a) In the Device list, click to select the device. In this example, the mixer, 840T-1(Serial), is selected.
b) Double-click the action (command) and change the value type to Variable Value.

(Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (3) 840T-1 vol (3) Variable Value Library Value Flag Variable ● Variable Value

Creating a Button for Bypassing Feedback to a Variable

Instead of creating a monitor event which automatically monitors the specified parameter at a defined interval, you can save the controller bandwidth by creating a button which performs the monitoring and saves the feedback to a variable only when pressed.

1. Create a variable for storing the received feedback. Select STRING for the variable. Configure other settings as required.

Variable Create a variable when you have a control variable that appears in two or more places on your ATEN Control System App. A variable refreshes and updates its setting in all places when it is changed in one place. Name NewVariable STRING Default Value NULL Description

a) In the Design tab, click Library.

b) Click the Variable (●) icon.

c) Using the indicated drop-down list, select the controller which controls the target device. The variables created for the devices managed by the selected controller are listed.

VK1200-ID02 Create New Name Temperature SpeakerVolume

d) Click . A Variable setup page appears.

e) In the Setup page, configure the following settings.

◆ Name: Type a name for the Variable.

◆ String format: Select STRING.

- Unicode: (Only available for string variables) Select this setting for multilingual text to be encoded and represented correctly in the variable.

◆ Default value: Type a default for the setting.

◆ Description: Optionally add additional information for the variable.
- Select a command execution type.

• Execute commands with no conditions: Execute the command (action) when the value of the specified Variable changes.

• Execute commands with the specified conditions: Execute the corresponding command (action) when the Variable matches

• In a Viewer page, create a button object.

• Configure its button actions.

a) Add a command for receiving feedback.
b) Select Condition and then drag-and-drop a Feedback If command under your feedback command.

Button Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 Set Variable 2 Function Variable II Variable Else II Variable Else Feedback II Feedback Else II Feedback Else 3 Commands Serial ASCII on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) Data: wait 0.30 s If - Feedback bypass ASCII equal to include bypass

c) Set the feedback to bypass.

1. Add a variable command. Select a variable to store the feedback and then select Bypass.

Button Action Device Room 1 Function Commands VX200-001 Variable # Variable Else # Variable Else Feedback # Feedback Else # Feedback Else Set Flag Condition Link Change Button State Serial ASCII on VK200-ID01 Port (1) Data wait 0.30 sec. L ifFeedback bypass ASCII Set NewVariable Bypass FEEDBACK_RESULT (STRING)

Timers

A timer event is used to initiate a device action as soon as the defined countdown time is up. The advantage of using a timer event, as opposed to a combination of delay command and device command, is that it saves time by executing the defined action while other actions (commands) within the series execute.

On top of initiating a specified action, you can also create additional controls on the Viewer to manually restart or stop the action. For example, for a start meeting button, you would like to initiate the following series of actions when triggered:

Sequence of Action	Target Device	Device Action Requirements
1	projector the projector to switch	Turn on the projector It takes to its HDMI source	8 seconds for the projector to turn on and get ready.
2 Set			This action can only be initiated when the projector is turned on.
2	A T E Switch	Display input Mto display 1 via ATEN Matrix Switch (VM5808H)	fThis action is independent of the previous one, and can be initiated at the same time.
3 projector screen Bring		down the projector screen	-
4 air conditioner Turn on		air conditioner	-
5 lighting system Turn on		the lights	-

Among these actions, action #2 (switching source on a projector) can be designed as a timer event because:

• it needs a countdown (of 8 seconds) before the action can be initiated
  ◆ the remaining actions can be initiated without action #2 being completed

The configuration for the start meeting button is as follows, with the projector source switching configured as a timer event:

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Macro Timer Set Variable Function VK2200-ID01 Commands (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (5) EB Series Power ON Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start start in 10 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (4) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Relay Pulse on VK2200-ID01 Port (1) 0.1 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (5) CoolMasterNet allon (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (7) EZ-5645S Light Control(ID00)(chane/ALL) (on/offON)

Configuring a Timer Event

1. Create a timer event in the Library.

a) In Configurator, go to 3. Design > Library 📄, and then click Timer in the pop-up window. This screen appears.

VK2200-ID01 + Create New Name

b) Select a controller to which you wish to create the timer event to.

VK2200-ID01 + Create New Name

c) Click . The Timer window appears.

d) Add a device action (command). For more details about commands (device actions), see Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions, page 168. For example, for a projector to switch its input source to HDMI, click the device in the Device column and then double-click the input source

command from the Function column. Double-click the added command to select HDMI for the Input Source.

Timer Meeting Start Name Default (Sec. ) Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2200-ID01 VM5800H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) A/V Mute * A/V Mute GET Aspect Setting * Aspect Setting GET Freeze * Freeze GET Input Source * (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (B) EB Series Input Source HDMI1

To see only the added actions (commands) in this view, click

e) Rename the timer event and configure the countdown duration.

Timer Meeting Start Name 10 Default (Sec.) Action 1 Device Room-1 2 Function 3 Commands VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) A/V Mute * A/V Mute GET Aspect Setting * Aspect Setting GET Freeze * Freeze GET Input Source * Lamp Hour Power * (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (B) EB Series Input Source HDMI1

1. Apply the timer to a control element (e.g. a button or a slider bar).

a) Click the target control element.

Example: a meeting start button

Home Page COMPANY LOGO HERE START MEETING

b) In Action settings, click the target device (for the timer event), click Timer, and then double-click a function to add a timer event.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2200-ID01 VM5808H(Serial) CoolMasterNet(Serial) EZ-5645S(Serial) EB Series(Serial) Function VK2200-ID01 Macro Timer Set Variable Set Flag Condition Link Link SubPage Commands (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Power ON Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start start in 10 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (4) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Relay Pulse on VK2200-ID01 Port (1) 0.1 Sec (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (5) CoolMasterNet allon (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (7) EZ-5645S Light Control(ID00)(channel/ALL) (on/offON)

c) To configure the timer, double-click the added timer in the Commands column and select from the drop-down menus.

(Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (8) EB Series Power ON - Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start start in Default Value 10 Sec. (Serial) on VK2200-ID01 Port (4) VM5808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01 Relay Pulse on VK2200-ID01 Port (1) 0.1 Sec

The following settings are available:

• controller:
• timer: to change the current timer to another that is already created in the Library.
• timer type: you can change the action from starting a specified action to stop or restart.
  ◆ countdown duration

The timer action starts counting down as soon as the associated control is triggered, and the action initiates when the countdown time is up.

1. (Optional) Create another control (e.g. a button) for stopping or restarting the timer.

a) Add the control element to the Viewer page.
b) Click the control element, and add the timer event you created in step 1, and double-click the command to select Restart or Stop from the dropdown list.

- Timer VK2200-ID01 Meeting Start restart start stop restart

Duplicating a Created Timer

To duplicate a created timer to another controller, right-click a timer, mouse over Duplicate, and then select a target controller.

VK0200-ID03 + Create New Name New Timer New Timer (1) Duplicate VK2200-ID01 VK1200-ID02 VK0200-ID03

Centralized Monitoring and Control via Unizon™

Overview

Unizon™

Unizon ^™ is a server-based software for centralized monitoring and control of standalone ATEN Video Matrix and ATEN-controller-managed AV devices, including ATEN and third-party devices. One ATEN control system allows management from up to two Unizon ^™ servers. Note that a license is required for using Unizon ^™ . For more information, see ATEN Unizon ^™ User Manual.

Monitor ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™

When an ATEN-controller-managed AV device is added to Unizon ^™ , the following information is available in the Unizon ^™ platform:

♦ connection status with Unizon™
- current IP address
◆ firmware version
◆ license usage (only applicable to ATEN controllers)

You can also create parameters to be monitored via Unizon ^™ . For example, you may want to monitor the total hours used on a projector lamp so that you can arrange for replacement in advance when the accumulated lamp hour reaches a specified number. For setup details, see Creating a Monitor Item, page 239.

Control ATEN-controller-managed Devices via Unizon™

You can remotely operate ATEN-controller-managed devices via Unizon ^™ , such as switching video sources on displays, changing the resolution setting, etc., by creating control items in the controller project file. For setup details, see Creating a Control Item, page 242.

Enabling Monitoring and Control via Unizon™

Follow the steps below to enable monitoring and control of controller-managed devices via Unizon ^TM .

1. In Configurator, select devices to allow management via Unizon ^TM .

a) Open the target project and go to the Device tab.
b) In the Unizon column, select devices for remote management via Unizon™. For example:

Device Configuration VK2100-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Unizon Serial 1 VM0808H RS232 Room-1 ✓ Serial 2 VM1616T RS232 Room-1 ✓ Serial 3 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 Serial 4 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 ▼ Room-1 I/O 1 Switch Output ▼ Room-1 I/O 2 None Output ▼ Room-1 I/O 3 None Output ▼ Room-1 I/O 4 None Output ▼ Room-1 IR 1 VS481A IR ▼ Room-1 IR 2 None IR ▼ Room-1 IR 3 None IR ▼ Room-1 IR 4 None IR ▼ Room-1 Relay 1 Switch-1 Room-1 Relay 2 None Room-1 Relay 3 None Room-1 Relay 4 None Room-1 Ethernet 1 VE8950 TELNET Room-1 ✓ Ethernet 2 VE8900 TELNET Room-1 Ethernet 3 B96 ONVIF Room-1

1. (Optional) Create parameters for monitoring and/or control. For detailed steps, see:

♦ Creating a Monitor Item, page 239
♦ Creating a Control Item, page 242

1. Upload the project to the controller.

2. On Unizon™'s web interface, add the controller. For details, see ATEN Unizon™ User Manual.

Creating a Monitor Item

1. Open the project file, go to Design >Unizon, and click on the device category of the target device to open the configuration page.

Example: To add a monitor item to a third-party projector, click Projector.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Controller... Viewer... Unizon Projector Projector Room Device Name Add Function Item Room-1 NP-PX Series

1. In the configuration page, click

and then select Item

Add Monitor Item in a pop-up dialog box. A new monitor item is added.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Monitor Item Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H Sync Variable VM1616T Sync Variable

1. Double-click the header Monitor Item to rename the parameter.

Example: Rename it to Lamp Hour.

Projector Projector Room Device Name Lamp Hour Add Function Item Room-1 NP-PX Series Sync Variable

1. Create a variable to store the value of the parameter and optionally configure alert settings.

Example: Create a variable to store the accumulated lamp hour and set up an alert at a specific number.

a) Under the monitor item you just created, click Sync Variable. The Properties panel appears on the right.

b) In the Properties panel, click Set Sync Condition. The Edit Sync Condition dialog box appears.

c) In the General tab, click the first drop-down menu and select Create Variable to create a variable. For details about creating variables, see Variables, page 222.

d) In the General tab, select the variable you just created and configure related settings. For example:

Edit Sync Condition General Monitoring Step 1 Select synchronized variables. Use LampHour Step 2 Variable display Select expression Raw Data Step 3 Edit label unit style hr Ex: % dB... Show More Save Cancel

e) Optionally set up alerts for this monitor item. For example:

Edit Sync Condition General Monitoring Step 1 ✓ Set alert levels Step 2 Edit Sync Condition ● Moderate alert ≥ 2000 Add Condition ● Critical alert = 2200 Add Condition Show More Save Cancel

Creating a Control Item

1. Open the project file, go to Design >Unizon, and click on the device category of the target device to open the configuration page.

Example: To add a control item to a Video Matrix, click Video Matrix Switch.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Control... Viewer... Unizon Unizon Scenario Networked AV Video Matrix Switch Projector Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H VM1G16T

1. In the configuration page, click

and then select Item

Add Control Item in a pop-up dialog box. A new control item is added.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Control Item Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H VM1616T

1. Double-click the header Control Item to rename the parameter.

Example: Rename it to Output 1.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H VM1616T

1. Add and configure control options to this item.

Example: Create input 1 to 4 as options for switch the source on output 1.

a) Click

b) In the pop-up dialog box, type the name of the control option and click Create. Proceed to create all the control options as required.

Example: Type Input 1 and click Create. Add Input 2, 3, and 4.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 VM1616T Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

c) Click Input 1 and add the action in the Action panel. Proceed to configure each control action.

Note:

• The same entries are created for all devices in the list. Skip this step if the control action does not apply.
• For full details about configuring control actions, see Configuring Button/Slider Bar Actions, page 168.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Add Function Item Room-1 VM0808H Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

Action 1 Device Room-1 VK2100-ID01 VK236-ID01 VM0808H(Serial) VM1616T(Serial) NP-PX Series(Serial) VS481A(IR) Switch-1(Relay) Switch(IO) Function Implement port 1 connected ( load a Saved Profile * Manually implement the best Muto Output Port * Power off detection Power on detection save the current connection ( Switch Input Port * to Output B Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (1) VM0808H Switch Input Port 01 to Output Port 01

Removing a Monitor / Control Item

To remove a monitor or control item, right-click the header and select Delete.

Video Matrix Switch Video Matrix Switch Room Device Name Output 1 Delete Room-1 VM0808H Input 1 Rename Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 VM1616T Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4

The Upload Tab

The Upload page allows you to upload Viewers and/or back up projects to controllers.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Start the controller search by IP address via Auto Search or manually. Intelligent Search Auto Search Search for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP address Please select the viewer to upload. Edit Access Key VK1100-ID02 Viewer1 VK2100-01 Please check the connection and controller ID Upload to Controller Upload this project along with the Viewer

To back up a project and its Viewers to a controller:

1. Browse for the ATEN controller where you wish to save the configured Viewers.

2. Auto Search: Browsers for controllers on the same LAN with the Configurator.

3. Search by IP address: Use this function to browse for controllers that are on different LANs to the Configurator.

4. Verify the selected controller and viewer and configure the selection if required.

1. Project 2. Device 3. Design 4. Upload Start the controller search by IP address via Auto Search or manually. Intelligent Search Auto Search Search for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP address Please select the viewer to upload. Edit Access Key VK1100-ID02 Viewer1 VK2100-01 Please check the connection and controller ID Upload to Controller Upload this project along with the Viewer

- Controller highlighted black: This is the controller that is found in the network and its ID matches the one you specified in this project file. The viewers created for the controller are listed below this item.

- Controller highlighted gray: This is the controller that also exists in the network, but does not match the controller ID specified in this project file.

1. Optionally click on the following to configure password authentication settings.

Note: Due to security concerns, the access key of any ATEN controller will need to be modified at least once before the controller can be accessed for any of its functions. If you have not modified the access key, the upload will not be performed. To resolve this issue, log in to the controller's web interface and follow the on-screen prompt to modify the access key.

- Edit Access Key: Click to edit the access key you entered for uploading Viewers to the controller and download Viewers from a mobile device.

Note: A valid access key should only contain upper-case alphabets,

lower-case alphabets, and/or numerals. : An access key is required to upload Viewers to the controller and download Viewers from a mobile device.

◆ : An access key is not required to upload Viewers to the controller and download Viewers from a mobile device.

- : The access key has been changed on the controller's web interface (Dashboard). To change the lock status, click on the icon and type the new access key to proceed.

4. Click Upload to Controller.

Note: By default, the project file is uploaded along with your selected Viewers. To only upload the selected Viewers, click Also upload project file to disable the function.

Viewing Controller Information

Click to view the controller's information.

♦ IP Address: Displays the IP address.
♦ MAC Address: Displays the MAC address.
◆ License: Displays the number of licenses available and in use.

• Select License: Allows you to load a new license file.
• Reset License: Resets all license(s) in use by mobile devices. This will disconnect all mobile device connections to the controller.
• Firmware Version: Displays the firmware version.

◆ Capacity: Displays the amount of space available for uploading Viewers.
- Viewers: Lists the Viewers currently stored on the controller.

- Remove Viewer: Click the trash can icon to remove the Viewer stored on the controller.

◆ Project: Lists the project file currently stored in the controller.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 5

ATEN Database Generator

Overview

The ATEN Database Generator is a repository that allows you to establish and store commands for operating devices managed by ATEN Control System, and reuse them when configuring Viewers.

Accessing the Database Generator

In ATEN Configurator, goto Tools > Database Generator. The following window appears with the Add Device to My Library dialog box opened if you are accessing the Database Generator for the first time.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxx Ethernet xxxx Edit AUDIO Aten AKURA ACTION AMARK AMARK 123 Add Device to My Library Add New Device Add Device from ATEN Device Add Device from Driver File Do not show this dialog box again. Close Export Selected Device Delete Selected Device

Menu Description
Add New Device Configure a custom hardware device to add to My Library.
Add Device from ATEN Device Library	Add devices from the ATEN Device Library to My Library.
Add Device from Driver File	Add devices from a database file (*.vkd) to My Library.
Check Box	Click Do not show this dialog again to prevent the dialog from appearing when the Database Generator is opened. Use the Preferences menu option to bring the dialog window back.
Close Click the Close	button to exit the dialog window.
Add New Device Configure a custom hardware device to add to My Library.

My Library

My Library allows you to create custom hardware devices which can be selected to configure ports on the controller. My Library lists all the hardware devices that you have created, added, and edited using the Database Generator. You can create new hardware devices or add existing devices from the ATEN Device Library (page 274). These devices can then be selected from My Device Library for use.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand ▼ Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxx Ethernet xxx Edit AUDIO AUDIO MIXER Serial 1 Aten Control Box VK2100 Ethernet 2.4 AKURA Curtain ssssss Ethernet sss ACTION Display sss Relay 111 A MARK Audio Processor 111 IR 111 A MARK Digital Conference S... xxxxxx DO 123 123 sdf 456 Ethernet 1 Export Selected Device Delete Selected Device

ATEN Device Library ATEN Device Library My Device Library Create Device IR Relay Ethernet Version Property ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808H V2.2.219 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0808 V1.1.106 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404H V2.2.213 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM0404 V1.0.062

Function Tabs

More functions can be accessed from the function tabs toward the top of the My Library window. Refer to the table below for information about each function.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxxx Ethernet xxxx Edit AUDIO AUDIO MIXER Serial 1 Aten Control Box VK2100 Ethernet 2.4 AKURA Curtain ssssss Ethernet sss

Tab Description

File The File menu provides options to:

• Add New Device: Configure a custom hardware device to add to Device Library.
• Add Device from ATEN Device Library: Add devices from the ATEN Device Library to My Library.
• Add Device from Driver File: Add devices from a database file (*.vkd) to My Library.
• Export My Library: Saves My Library as a database file (*.vkd) that can be imported later.
• Export Selected Device: Saves the selected device(s) as a database file (*.vkd) that can be imported later.
• Controller Connection: Searches for a controller to test the connection or run the learning mode for the IR port.
• Quit: Exits the program.

Tab Description

Edit The Edit menu provides options to:Delete: Deletes the selected devices from the database.Duplicate: Makes a copy of the selected device(s) and adds them to the library with the extension “-Copy”Preferences: Provides options to:Set the LanguageShow Add Device dialog on startupShow IR Learning tipsSet the IR Learning Timeout - how long to attempt a connection to an IR device before IR learning stops.

Library Provides a list of the Libraries that you can open to select devices from and edit or add to My Library. The libraries that are listed here appear when you select a database using Add Device from Driver File.

Help Provides support and software version information.

Controls on the My Library Window

You can add new devices by creating a new device, duplicating an existing device, selecting a device from the ATEN Library or importing a driver file. Use the check boxes to select individual devices or All to select the entire list.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Type Version BIRMINGHAM CABLE Projector xxx Ethernet xxx Edit AUDIO AUDIO MIXER Serial 1 Aten Control Box VK2100 Ethernet 2.4 AKURA Curtain ssssss Ethernet sss ACTION Display sss Relay 111 A MARK Audio Processor 111 IR 111 A MARK Digital Conference S... xxxxxx DO 123 123 sdf 456 Ethernet 1 Export Selected Device Delete Selected Device

Click to add a new custom device to the database.

Select a device and click this icon to create a duplicate.

Click to add and edit a device from the ATEN Device Library.

Click to add a device from the driver file.

EDIT

Select a device and click Edit to change the settings.

Search

Key in word strings then click Search to find a device.

• Click All, Serial, IR, DO, Relay or Ethernet to filter the list by type.
• Click Brand, Category, Model, Type or Version to sort the devices.
• Click Export Selected Device to save the selected devices.
• Click Delete Selected Devices to remove the selected devices.

Editing / Adding a New Device

To edit or add a device to My Library, do the following:

1. From the menu select File → Add New Device, or select a device from My Library and click Edit.
2. Under General, use the drop-down menus or type in the Brand Name, Category, Model and Version.
   Note: The Category determines what buttons are auto generated when a Viewer page is created for the device.
3. Use the History button to open the Version History editor and make notes about the updates being made to the device configuration. You can create and use different versions of the same device and track the changes. The version history can be viewed and different versions selected from the ATEN Configurator, under device Properties.

4. Check the hardware type and configure the device. ATEN database generator supports serial, IR, digital output, relay, and Ethernet devices. For more information about configuring each of these device type devices, refer to the following sections.

5. Serial: See Serial Device, page 257.

6. IR: See IR Device, page 261.
   ◆ Digital output: See Digital Output Device, page 263.
   ♦ Relay: See Relay Device, page 264.
   ◆ Ethernet: See Ethernet Device, page 265.

Serial Device

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help ATEN Presentation Switch VP1420 Save Save As Cancel General Brand ATEN Category Presentation Switch Model VP1420 Version V1.1.103 History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Baud Rate 19200 Data Bit 8 Stop Bit 1 Parity None Flow Control None Mode RS232 Listen Advanced Function List Serial R DO Fisky Ethernet String Format HEX ASCII Function ▲ Command Message Display mode * displaymode [matrix:mirror]x0D/x0A Edit Send Echo * echo [on,off]x0D/x0A Edit Send Get Device Status read[x0D/x0A Edit Send Get FW Version read version[x0D/x0A Edit Send Get Output Audio... mute o[all=*,sys,01-03]x0D/x0A Edit Send Get Output Audio... read o[all=*,01-03] connection Edit Send Get Output Scale... scaling o[all=*,01-02]x0D/x0A Edit Send Get Output Video... read o[all=*,01-02] connection Edit Send Get Standby Stat... standby[x0D/x0A Edit Send Mute Output ** mute o[all=*,sys,01-03] [on,off]x0D/x0A Edit Send Power on power on[x0D/x0A Edit Send Standby * standby [on,off]x0D/x0A Edit Send Switch Input * to ... sw i[01-04] o[all=*,01-02]x0D/x0A Edit Send Switch mode * swmode plugin [auto,off]x0D/x0A Edit Send

Click to add an Action.

Click to create a duplicate of the Action.

Click to delete the selected action.

Click to enter a string within () which allows the text to be edited in the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list (see page 168).

Click to add a drop menu into a Command string, then enter the ber sequence in the brackets []. The Function name must include sterisk (*) for each drop menu in the Command string. The drop- n menu will appear where the (*) is entered in the Function name.

Click to add an Enter into the Command string.

Right-click one or more serial commands to copy and paste them as Ethernet commands of all protocols (except HTTP/HTTPS):

Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet String Format HEX Copy Paste Duplicate Delete Message Echo* Edit Send Get Device Sta Edit Send Get FW Version read version\x0D\x0A Edit Send Get Output Audio... mute o[all=*,sys,01-03]'x0D\x0A Edit Send

- Settings – Use the drop-down menus to set the: Baud Rate, Data Bit, Stop Bit, Parity, Flow Control and Mode settings.

- Listen – Use this function to create a list of device parameters that you want the controller to monitor by receiving notifications on setting or status changes of the specified parameters.

Note: To set up queries for the status of a device parameter, go to the Function List and click to add the querying action as a command.

- Advanced

• Delay Interval – Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.
• Feedback Timeout – Sets the maximum interval that the controller allows in between parts of a feedback message. If the controller has not received any feedback for longer than the specified Feedback Timeout, the controller identifies the last bit of the received information as the end of a feedback message.
• Receive Duration – Sets the allowed duration of time for the serial device to receive a complete message from the controller.
• Checksum Type – To have the checksum automatically calculated and filled in by the controller, select Modbus for this setting.
• Keep Connection Alive – Specify an interval that the controller waits before sending the specified command to test if the connection to the serial device is up or down.

- Function List – Use this section to configure the device functions by adding actions to the list.

- String Format – Use the buttons to select HEX or ASCII. To use HEX strings with ASCII one, select ASCII and type \x before typing the HEX strings.

Note: HEX strings are also supported under the ASCII format.

• Function – Lists the actions created for a device. A Function name must include an asterisk (*) if you are adding a drop menu to the Command string. Double-click to edit the function name.
• Command – Shows the command string created for the action. Double-click to edit the string.

• Message – The Message column is used to create and store feedback and/or queries for the corresponding command.

• For more information about adding feedback, see Testing Commands, page 270.

• For more information about creating queries, see Configuring Queries, page 272.

- Click Send to connect to a controller and test the typed command.

Please select a controller. Intelligent Search Intelligent Search Searches for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP Address Controller ID Model Name IP Address MAC Address Firmware ID-1 VK2100 10.3.41.119 00:10:74:b2:01:74 2.7.262.002 Serial OK Cancel

- Click to select a controller from the list. Use the Refresh button to refresh the list. To browse for controllers in the LAN, click the Intelligent Search button or type the IP address of the controller.

- Click OK to proceed to test the command. For details, see Testing Commands, page 270.

Text Command Tools

The following formats allow you to enter command strings with text that provide special features. These formats work in Serial and Ethernet commands.

- () entering text in () allows the command to be edited in the VK6000.

Example: (A1 A9) (A8 B6) – this command string will provide two editable text boxes from the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list which allow you to change the command string:

3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (2) 3 Function name A1 A9 A8 B6

◆ = using the equals sign before a text command allows you to type in words which will show up in a drop-down menu to describe the command, rather than show the text command itself.

Example: [Power On=0A, Power Off=0B, Standby Mode=0C] – this command string will provide a drop-down menu with three choices using the text before the equal signs to describe each command – from the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list:

3 Commands (Serial) on VK2100-ID01 Port (2) 1 query power sttus of the device POWER ON POWER ON POWER OFF STANDBY MOD

◆ “” quotation marks allow three symbols (, = @) to be added to a command that uses the equal sign as described in the example above. Three symbols not allowed within the quotation marks include (“” () []). Quotation marks can be used to the left of = in a HEX command; on either side of = in an ASCII command; and anywhere in an Ethernet command.

HEX Example: ["Power=On" = 0A, "POWER=Off" = 0B]

ASCII Example: ["Power=On" = pwn, "POWER=Off" = pwf]

In the HEX example, “Power=On” allows the equal sign to be inserted before =0A. If the quotes are removed, the command Power=On=0A would fail as an Invalid String.

IR Device

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help Audio Conferencing Save Cancel General Brand Category Audio Conferencing Model Version History Type Serial IR Pronto Code Status Digital Output Leamed Relay Ethernet Settings Repeat 2 Times (Default) Advanced Function List Serial IR RR Relay Ethernet Quick Mode + Function ▲ IR / Pronto Code Status Function name 1 00 00 00 EC 00 00 0 Leamed Learn Test Function name 2 IR Learn Test

Click to add an Action.

Click to create a duplicate of the Action

Click to delete the selected action.

- Settings – Use the drop-down menu to set the Repeat setting (number of times a signal is sent): 1 Time, 2 Times or 3 Times (Default).

◆ Advanced

• Delay Interval – Sets a time delay for each command before they are sent to the IR device.
• Receive Duration – Sets the allowed duration of time for the IR device to receive a complete message from the controller.

- Function List – Use this section to configure the IR functions by adding actions to the list.

- Click to add an action. In the pop-up dialog box:

- Auto Learn: Select this option to add the action through learning,

- Manual Input: Select this option to add the action using Pronto hex codes. Double-click the command to enter the Pronto code for the device.

Note: To obtain Pronto codes for a control system managed, third-party device, search Internet forums or the manufacturer's product web pages.

• Quick Mode – Click to run Learning Mode for all IR actions in the Function List. When the Quick Mode window opens, click Start, a pop-up window appears to select a controller. Check a box to select a controller and click Select. Click Start a second time to run Quick Mode using the Learn instructions below.
• Function – Lists the actions created for a device. Double-click to edit the Function the name.
• Status – Reports the status (Tested, Failed, Learned) of the Learn and Test buttons.
• Learn – Use to transfer commands from an IR remote to the Control Box. Click Learn. The Select Controller window appears.

- Click to select a controller from the list. Use the Refresh button to refresh the list. To browse for controllers in the LAN, click the Intelligent Search button or type the IP address of the controller.

Please select a controller. Intelligent Search Intelligent Search Searches for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP Address ID-1 Model Name IP Address MAC Address Firmware ID-1 VK2100 10.3.41.119 00:10:74:b2:01:74 2.7.262.002

- Click Learn a second time to start learning mode. When the IR Learn LED flashes green, point the IR remote at the Control Box's front panel IR Receiver and push a button on the remote. Press the button on the remote just as you would when using it with the hardware device. If the device responds to a long hold or quick tap of the remote's button then you must press the button in the same manor (long hold or quick tap) when it using for Learning mode. The Control Box will beep and the Learn LED will light solid (then turn off) when IR learning is successful. The LED also turns off if Learning mode times out.

- Test – Use to test if commands are sent successfully to the Control Box and hardware device.

- Click Test, a pop-up window appears to select a controller and the IR port. Check a box to choose a controller and use the drop-down menu to select the IR port and then click Select.

- Click Test a second time to test if the IR data transmits successfully to the Control Box. Check the hardware device to confirm that it responded appropriately.

- The Status column reports the Learn and Test results.

Digital Output Device

AUDIO SOURCE Projector Save Save As Cancel General Brand AUDIO SOURCE Category Projector Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Advanced Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Function ▲ Command Function name 1 Open

Click to add an Action.

Click to create a duplicate of the Action

Click to delete the selected Action.

• Advanced – Click to use the Delay Interval drop-down menu to set a timed delay for each command before it is sent to the device.
• Function List – Use this section to configure the Digital Output device functions by adding actions to the list.

◆ Function – Lists the actions created for a device. Double-click to edit the Function name.

- Command – Shows the command selected for the action. Click the drop-down menu to select an action (Open, Close, Toggle, Pulse).

Relay Device

AUDIO SOURCE Projector Save Save As Cancel General Brand AUDIO SOURCE Category Projector Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Advanced Function List Small IR NO Relay Ethernet Function ▲ Command Function name 1 -- + +

Click to add an Action.

Click to create a duplicate of the Action

Click to delete the selected Action.

• Advanced – Click to use the Delay Interval drop-down menu to set a timed delay for each command before it is sent to the device.

• Function List – Use this section to configure the Relay device functions by adding actions to the list.

• Function – Lists the actions created for a device. Double-click to edit the Function name.

• Command – Shows the command selected for the action. Click the drop-down menu to select an action (Open, Close, Toggle, Pulse).

Ethernet Device

General Brand AUDIO SOURCE Category Projector Model Version History Type Serial IR Digital Output Relay Ethernet Settings Protocol TELNET Port 23 Advanced Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet + Function ▲ Command Feedback Function name 1 Send

Click to add an Action.

Click to create a duplicate of the Action.

Click to delete the selected action.

Click to enter a string within () which allows the text to be edited in the VK6000 in the Button Action - Commands list (see page 168).

Click to add a drop menu into a Command string, then enter the ber sequence in the brackets []. The Function name must include sterisk (*) for each drop menu in the Command string.

Click to add an Enter into the Command string.

Right-click one or more Ethernet commands (except HTTP/HTTPS) to copy and paste them as serial commands:

Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet + - Function ▲ Copy Command Feedback Trun on OutputPart* Paste sw o[01-04] onxDv0A Duplicate Delete

For special command string tools, see Text Command Tools, page 260.

- Settings

• Protocol – Click the drop-down list to select a protocol for the device
• Port – Type the port number for the device.
• Advanced – Click to configure the following settings. The supported settings may vary depending on the device protocol and authentication type.

Delay Interval Sets a	time delay for each command before they are sent to the device.
Delay Time after Login	Sets a time interval that the controller waits to request for login credentials of a device after establishing connection with the device.
Receive Duration Sets	the allowed duration of time for the Ethernet device to receive a complete message from the controller.
Send command after successful connection	Enter a First and Second Command to send to the device after a successful connection has been established.
Auth Type Sets the authentication type for the device.
Timeout Specifies the maximum time that the device allows for receiving each feedback message from the device before timing out.
URI path	Type the part of the WebSocket URI that follows its communication port. For example, if the URI is wss://:31416/Dicentis/API, type /Dicentis/API in this field.
Sub-protocol	Type the subprotocol for the Ethernet device. This information shall be available in the device's reference or user manual.
ExHeader Type the required data for handshake header.
Extension	Type the required data for the Sec-WebSocket-Extensions header field.
Login Command Sets the command for logging in to the device.
Parameter Sets the p	parameters (keys) of the device that are required for the controller to connect to the device. For example, the device username and password are required when connecting to the device, and the valid values areadminand 123456respectively.
	Parameter
Keep Connection Alive	Specify an interval during which the controller sends the specified command to make sure the it is connected to the Ethernet device.
Automatically reconnect if no return message is received	Check this box if you want to continue reconnection attempts when no return message is received from the device.
WSS Select to encrypt the WebSocket connection.
Use Default Click this	button to restore to default settings.

- Function List – Use this section to configure the device functions by adding actions to the list.

• String Format – Use the buttons to select HEX or ASCII. (TCP only)
• Function – Lists the actions created for a device. A Function name must include an asterisk (*) for each drop menu you add to the Command string. Double-click to edit the function name. The dropdown menu will appear where the (*) is entered in the Function name

- Command – Shows the command string created for the action.

• To edit a command for a Telnet, PJLINK, ONVIF, or TCP compliant device, double-click the Command field (green area in the interface).
• To edit a command for an HTTP or HTTPS compliant device, click the Edit button. The Edit HTTP Command window appears.

Edit HTTP(S) Command Type HTTP Method GET URI Command Clear Parameter Command Clear Header Command Clear Body Command Clear Save Cancel

• Feedback – Stores return messages generated by testing the command strings. Double-click to manually add or remove stored messages. This function is not applicable for ONVIF devices.
• Send – Click this button to test the command for the function. The return messages can be saved to Feedback.

This screen appears when Send is clicked. Select a controller for the device to connect and configure the fields such as device IP address.

Please select a controller. Intelligent Search Intelligent Search Searches for all controllers on the LAN Search by IP Address Controller ID Model Name IP Address MAC Address Firmware ID-1 VK2100 10.3.41.119 00:10:74:b2:01:74 2.7.262.002 ID-3 VK2100 10.3.41.97 00:10:74:b2:01.99 2.6.253.002 HTTP(S) IP Address Encryption None OK Cancel

Intelligent Search Click	to locate controller without specifying an IP address. This option only searches for controllers on the same local area network. For controllers across a network device, such as a router or switch, you must specify the IP address.
Search by IP address	Enter the IP address and click Search to locate a controller.
Controller ID Use the c	check box to select the Controller, fill in the IP Address, Username and/or Password and then click OK. Next use the instructions below this table.
Refresh Click this button	to refresh the Controller ID list.
IP Address Type the IP	address of the device.
Username Type the dev	vice's username.
Password Type the dev	vice's password to grant access right to the controller.
Receive message for S	specifies the maximum allowed time that the device receives messages from the selected controller.

Note: The username and password are not required for UDP and TCP devices, and the username is not required for PJLINK devices.

Testing Commands

After selecting a controller for the device and configure the required settings (if any) in the select controller window, click OK to proceed to test the typed command. The Test Command window appears.

Test Command 1 Send Command Add Speaker to All Speaker List Send to all Send to specific URI: api/speakers Parameter: Header: Body: \x5b (1) \x5d Send TestCommand Cancel

Select which device to send command to by choosing Send to all or Send to specific and then click Send Test Command. This window appears.

Test Command 2 Feedback message Function Feedback Add Speaker to All Speaker List Waiting Add Pause Saved Feedback Message Add feedback... Save & Exit Cancel

The test results will appear in the yellow area of the window and the feedback messages listed in the Feedback column.

• Add – Click to save a feedback message in the Saved Feedback message window.
• Pause / Continue – Click to pause sending/receiving the command/return message.
• Save & Exit – Save the feedback messages to the list and close the window.

Configuring Queries

You can set up queries to actively monitor parameters of a serial or Ethernet device and store the obtained value into a variable for reuse in a control system project.

Take the example of querying the cumulative number of hours that a projector lamp has been used to be able to estimate the remaining lifespan and plan for replacement in advance.

1. In Database Generator, click Edit to enter the settings page for the projector.

ATEN Database Generator File Edit Library Help My Library Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand ▼ Category Model Type Version EPSON Projector EB Series-test Serial 1.0 Edit ATEN Networked AV InternalTest Serial/Ethernet 1 ATEN Video Matrix Switch VM3250 Serial/Ethernet v1.2.116 ATEN Presentation Switch VP1420 Serial/Ethernet V1.1.103

1. Add a command by clicking and double-click the command column to type the command of requesting for the cumulative lamp usage (hour). Consult the user manual for the device to find out the operation command.

Function List Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet String Format HEX ASCII + T1 Function ▲ Command Message Lamp Hour LAMP21x0D1x0A Edit Send

1. Set up a variable to store the queried value.

a) In the Message column, click Edit. The Edit Messages window appears.
b) Click the Script tab and click +Add Script and name the script.

c) Write up a script to create a variable that stores the requested value, in this case, the cumulative lamp hour.

Edit Messages Feedback Script Read Lamp Hour 1 Edit Script Script Information Query 0.1 Sec Trigger Mode and function vk_parser(input) if input == nil or input == "" then return end for index, hour in string gmatch (s, "LAMP(%?+)") do local index = tonumber(index) projectorInfoTable[index] = {} _G[Projector_TAG_DEFINE_LAMP] = hour end 2 Configure Variable Variable List Name Way Range Default vk_var_5 NULL + Add Script Next Save

d) Click Save.

ATEN Library

The ATEN Library can be accessed from the project bar and provides the complete list of hardware devices available in the database. The You can add any device in the ATEN Library to My Library. Once a device is added to My Library, the device settings can be edited as needed.

ATEN Device Library File Edit Library Help Search All Serial IR DO Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Type Version ZONDA TV ZONDA 1 IR V1.0 ZON Audio Processor ZAC SERIES IR V1.0 ZON Audio Processor ZON 1 IR V1.0 ZENTH SAT SAT1576 IR V1.0 ZENITH NETWORK Set-Top Box CABLE1495 IR V1.0 ZENITH TV 50M88W IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B25A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B25A74R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B25A76R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B27A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B27A74R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B27A76R IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B32A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B36A24Z IR V1.0 ZENITH TV B50M88W IR V1.0 Add to My Library Cancel

• Use the check boxes to select devices to add to My Library. Check All to select all devices in the list.
  ◆ Key in word strings then click Search to find a device.
• Click All, Serial, DO, IR, Relay or Ethernet to filter the device list by type.
• Click Brand, Category, Model, Type or Version to sort the devices.
• Click Add to My Library to add the selected devices to My Library.
• Click Cancel to return to My Library.

Chapter 6

Remote PC Control

Overview

While being capable of controlling serial, IR, I/O, and relay equipment, ATEN controllers also support remote control of computers This control is achieved with a program, ControlAssist, that grants control right to a specified ATEN controller via the network. When a computer is installed with ControlAssist, you can remotely perform the following:

• Control PowerPoint slides
• Control media files through Windows Media Player
• Initiate actions on third-party programs using hotkeys that have been defined for the programs
• Perform system control such as shutting down the computer, execute command prompt, set system volume, and run a program

Note: For a full list of supported actions, see Supported PC Control Actions, page 286.

Specifications

◆ Supported computers
- Only Windows-based computers are supported for remote control.
- Each computer is deemed as an Ethernet device to the ATEN controller, and therefore follows the specification that each controller can support up to 25 Ethernet devices.

- To use ATEN Viewers on a Windows platform, make sure to install Internet Explorer version 11 or later.

◆ PowerPoint File Control

• ControlAssist only supports PowerPoint files that contain 200 slides or less, and are created using Microsoft Office 2007/2010/2013, or WPS Office.
• ControlAssist only supports the following PowerPoint file formats: pps, ppt, and pptx.

Media File Control

- ControlAssist only supports media files created using Windows Media Player.

- When a media file is remotely enabled and controlled using an ATEN Viewer, the file opens in Windows Media Player and this setting can not be changed.

- If you encounter any issues playing a media file, try install a third-party video codec.

- ControlAssist only supports control of the following media file formats:

Category File Formats
Windows Media format asf, wma, wmv, wm
Windows Media Metafiles asx, was, wvx, wmx, wpl
Microsoft Digital Video Recording dvr-ms
Windows Media Download Package wmd
Audio Visual Interleave avi
Moving Pictures Experts Group mpg, mpeg, m1v, mp2, mpa, mpe, m3u
Musical Instrument Digital Interface mid, midi, rmi
Audio Interchange File Format aif, aifc, aiff
Sun Microsystems and NeXT au, snd
Audio for Windows wav
CD Audio Track	cda
Indeo Video Technology	ivf
Windows Media Player Skins	wmz, wms
QuickTime movie file	mov
MP4 audio file	m4a
MP4 video file	mp4, m4v, mp4v, 3g2, 3pg2, 3gp, 3gpp
Windows audio file aac, adt, adts

Setting Up Remote PC Control

Follow the steps below to install the required programs on the target computers, configure the associated controller, and customize the Viewer for remote PC control.

1. Make sure you have installed Microsoft Visual C++ Redistributable for Visual Studio 2015 to the target computer. To download the package, go to https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=48145
2. Install ControlAssist on the computer you wish to control. For detailed steps, see Installing ControlAssist on Target Computers, page 277.
3. Add the computer into the control system. For detailed steps, see Adding Target Computers to the Control System, page 280.
4. Create a control interface to be used on a licensed mobile device.

- For detailed steps, see Configuring a Control Interface, page 282.

- For details on licenses, see Licenses for Mobile Control, page 84.

Installing ControlAssist on Target Computers

Follow the steps below to install ControlAssist on the computers you wish to control.

1. Download ControlAssist.

a) Visit the ATEN download page: https://www.aten.com/global/en/products/professional-audiovideo/control-system/controlassist/
b) Search for “VK6000”. A list of downloads for VK6000 appears.
c) Click ControlAssist_Vx.x.xxx.zip to download.

1. From the downloaded file, double-click ControlAssist_Setup to install the program. An installation wizard appears.
2. Follow the on-screen instruction to complete the installation.

3. When the installation is complete, ControlAssist runs in the system tray.

4. To configure ControlAssist, right-click in the system tray and select Settings. This window appears.

ControlAssist Basic Settings Certification & Private key About ATEN ControlAssist Basic Settings Username admin Password ****** Change Password Port 6277 Session Timeout (seconds) 3600 *The value must be between 30 to 3600. Root Folder %MY_COMPUTER% ATEN Save

Click the Basic Settings, Certification & Private Key, or About ATEN ControlAssist to access the following settings/information.

Control Default	Description
Basic SettingsThe settings with which an ATEN controller needs to establish connection with the computer and to gain control right.
Username admin The	credentials required for an ATENcontroller to establish connection with the computer.
Password password		Note: To change the username and password, make sure to log in the computer using an Administrator account.
Port 6277 The port through which ATEN Configuratorestablishes connection with the ControlAssist-installed computer.
Session timeout 3600	The maximal time allowed for the controller to establish connection with ControlAssist.
Root Folder N/A This field specifies the computer path underwhich files are display in the PowerPoint Control and Media templates' file list. To display files at the computer's partition level,type %MY_COMPUTER% in this field.
Control Default	It Description
Upload SSL Certificate and Private Key
Upload an SSL certificate and its private key to secure sessions between the computer and the connected controller.
Certificate Default	certificate	Click Choose a file from... to browse for an SSL certificate.
Private key Default	private key	Click Choose a file from... to browse for a private key SSL certificate.
About ATEN ControlAssist
Version N/A Indicates	the release version.
Visit Official Website	N/A Click to open the official website for more information.
Note: If the text in the ControlAssist window appears oversized, change the desktop font size to its default, and then log in the computer again to resolve the issue.

Adding Target Computers to the Control System

After you have installed ControlAssist on the computers you wish to control, follow the steps below to establish connection between the controller and the target computers.

1. From ATEN Configurator, locate and open your project file.
2. Click the Device tab, and from the Ethernet device type category, click on a blank device or click Add More Devices to add one.
3. Click Library. This window appears.

ATEN Device Library All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Property Aten Video Switches VS881 V1.0 Aten Video Switches VS481B V1.0.062 Aten Video Splitters VS0102 V1.1.102 Aten Video Splitters VS0104 V1.1.102 Aten Video Splitters VS0108 V1.1.102 Aten Video Splitters VS172 V1.0.065 Aten Video Splitters VS174 V1.0.065 Aten Video Splitters VS1814T V1.1.103 Aten Video Splitters VS1818T V1.1.103 Aten Video Splitters VS1804T V1.1.107 Aten Video Splitters VS1808T V1.1.107 Aten Extenders VE200 V1.0 Aten Extenders VB552 V1.0 Aten Multi View KVM Switche CM1164 V1.1.105 Aten Converters VC1080 V1.3.127 Aten Tool Control/Assist V1.0 HTTPS MATSUI TV TV1057 V1.0 MATSUI TV TV1068 V1.0 MATSUI TV TV1160 V1.0 Add To Project More device drivers

1. Use the search box to search for "controlassist" to load the ControlAssist database. This screen appears.

ATEN Device Library controlassist All Serial DO IR Relay Ethernet Brand Category Model Version Aten Tool ControlAssst V1.0 Add To Project More device drivers

1. Click Add to Project. This computer, identified as an Ethernet device installed with ControlAssist, appears in the Device Configuration List.

VK2100-ID01 Device Configuration VK2100-ID01 Type Device Mode Room Serial 1 VM0404H RS232 Room-1 Serial 2 VM0404H-1 RS232 Room-1 Serial 3 VS0801H RS232 Room-1 Serial 4 VM3404H RS232 Room-1 Serial 5 None RS232 Room-1 Serial 6 None RS232 Room-1 I/O 1 None Output Room-1 I/O 2 None Output Room-1 I/O 3 None Output Room-1 I/O 4 None Output Room-1 IR 1 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices IR 2 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices IR 3 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices IR 4 None IR Room-1 + Add More Devices Relay 1 None Room-1 Relay 2 None Room-1 Relay 3 None Room-1 Relay 4 None Room-1 Ethernet 1 VM5404D TELNET Room-1 + Add More Devices Ethernet 2 ControlAssist-1 HTTPS Room-1 Remove

1. Select the newly added device and configure the Properties settings on the right of the interface.

Hint: If you have more than one computers installed with ControlAssist, change the device name to distinguish these PCs.

For details on Properties settings, see Ethernet Device Properties, page 121.

Configuring a Control Interface

Example 1:

Follow the steps below to create a control interface that allows you to browse and play any file from the specified root folder (see page 277) in the target computer. You can follow the same logic for creating a media control page.

1. In the Design tab, make sure your home page contains a presentation button and the Viewer contains a PowerPoint page.

1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload Controller Viewer Viewer 1 Home Page PowerPoint Media Home Page ATEN Remote PC Control with ATEN ControlAssist PC Control Apps CUSTOM

1. Configure the button to have it link to the PowerPoint page if pressed in the Viewer.

a) Click the presentation button.
b) Select Link and then double-click the PowerPoint page.

Button Action Device Room-1 VK2100HD01 Macro Link Set Variable Set Flag Condition Function Home Page PowerPoint Media Commands Link To PowerPoint

1. Configure the PowerPoint page if you did not use a built-in Viewer template.

a) In the left sidebar, click PowerPoint.
b) In the PowerPoint page, right-click any blank spot and select PowerPoint Control Template. A pre-made screen is added.

PowerPoint Properties Web Name: Foot Arial 10 pt Image Named Pooled Transparency Position & Size Position X Y 223 112 Size Width Height 625 534 Reset Image Size Select Device ControlAssist Action

c) In the Properties column, use the Select Device drop-down menu to select the PC that stores the PowerPoint files you want to play.

Example 2:

Follow the steps below to create a quick access button for opening and playing a specific PowerPoint file. You can follow the same logic to create a button for opening and playing a specific media file.

ATEN Configurator - [Computex 20LT053D.vkproj*] File Edit View Object Tools Windows Help 1 Project 2 Device 3 Design 4 Upload Controller Viewer iPad standby presentation conference Page1 TV standby presentation conference Presentation Select Start on Main TV 2a 2b Button Action Device RECO-1 Device RECO-1 PowerPoint PC(LAN) 2K Luminator(RLAN) GoFC08C08(LAN) Control(Accia)LAN Macro Link Set Flag Condition Charge Button State Function [Media Control] Switch Mode mode * [Media Control] Switch Report mode * [Media Control] Next * [Media Control] Previous * [Media Control] Close * [Media Control] Open play list * [PowerPoint control] Open file * [PowerPoint control] Start Presentation * [PowerPoint control] End Presentation * [PowerPoint control] Close * [PowerPoint control] Go to Next slide Commands [Control(Accia)] or VK2100/IDE1 Ethernet (S) Control(Accia) [PowerPoint controls] Up [Control(Accia)] or VK2100/IDE1 Ethernet (S) Control(Accia) [PowerPoint controls] Stop

1. Create an outlook for the interface.

a) In ATEN Configurator, click the Design tab.
b) Click Add Page and rename the page to "presentation".
c) Customize the interface and add control buttons using the Properties settings in the right-hand column. For details, see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 127.

1. Define the action of each button. For example, for the PowerPoint button to open and start a slide show when pressed, do the following:

a) In the preview pane, click the PowerPoint button.
b) Select ControlAssist (LAN).
c) Double-click [PowerPoint] Open file and then [PowerPoint] Start presentation.
d) Configure the commands and arrange them in the order of execution.

Tip: The asterisk (*) at the end of a Function indicates that it requires configuration in the Commands column.

For details on supported control actions, see Supported PC Control Actions, page 286.

1. From the Upload tab, deploy and back up the project to the controller. For details, see The Upload Tab, page 245.

Supported PC Control Actions

Command Function
Note: Commands indicated with an asterisk require configuration after being added to the Commands column in the Configurator.
[Media Control]Note: The commands in this group apply to Windows Media Player only.
Close Closes the player.
Next Plays next in the playlist.
Open file* Opens and plays the specified file in Windows Media Player.
Open playlist*	Opens and plays the specified playlist in Windows Media Player.
Pause Pauses the playback.
Play Plays the opened file in Windows Media Player.
Previous Plays previous in the playlist.
Set volume to* Sets the player to a specified volume.
Stop Stops the playback.
Switch to full screen mode*	Enables or disables the player to full-screen display.
Switch to mute mode* Enables or disables mute mode.
Switch to repeat mode* Enables or disables repeated play.
Volume* Adjusts the player's volume up or down.
[PowerPoint Control]
Open file* Opens the specified PowerPoint file.
Start presentation	Starts the slide show of the specified PowerPoint file.
End presentation	Ends the slide show of the specified PowerPoint file.
Close Closes the opened PowerPoint file.
Go to next slide*	Goes to the next slide.
Go to previous slide	Goes to the previous slide.
Go to slide	Goes to a specified slide number.
[System Control]
Open file* Opens a specified file saved in the target computer.
Open URL*	Opens a specified URL.
Run program*	Runs an application.
Shut down PC	Shuts down the computer.
Set volume* Adjusts the computer's volume.
Execute Command Prompt*	Executes the specified command via Command Prompt.
Bring application to top* Keeps the window of the specified program on top of other windows that are open on the desktop.
[Hotkey Control]
Create action Executes the associated hotkey(s) on the program that opens topmost on the computer desktop.For example, if you have “Ctrl + f” defined as the hotkey for extending a program to full screen in the program itself, to remotely simulate this action, you should have one Create action command associated with two Select key commands, one defined as “Ctrl”, and the other as “f”:
Select key* Use this command to specify the hotkey as defined in the target program. If the hotkey involves pressing two or more keys at the same time, you will have two or more Select key commands associated to one Create action command. See the example in the Create action command above.

Note: Adhere to the following guidelines when specifying file paths:

• Include the file name and file extension of the target file.
  ◆ Use double backward slashes between folder levels.
• If the file path contains space, put the file path in double quotations.
• The following are examples of valid file paths:

"C:\ControlAssist\Presentation.pptx"

"C:\ControlAssist\Presentation Demo.pptx"

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Chapter 7

ATEN Control System App

Overview

The ATEN Control System App is a platform that allows you to operate your control system using pre-made Viewers on mobile devices with an iOS, Android, or Windows platform.

Requirements

Make sure your mobile device uses a supported version of the mobile operating system listed below before installing the app.

Mobile Operating System Supported Version
iOS 10.0 or later
Android 8.0 or later
Windows 7 or later

Installing the App

To install the ATEN Control System App on a mobile device, do the following:

1. From the mobile device, tap the App Store icon.
   or Google Play
2. In the search box, type "aten control".
3. Tap ATEN Control System, and then download and install the app.
4. The ATEN Control System icon the icon to open the app.

Note: The button sound is enabled by default. To mute button sound, go to Settings of the mobile device, find ATEN Control app and disable the button sound setting.

Demo/Start Screen

When you open the ATEN Control System app for the first time, the demo/start screen appears:

graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B["SYSTEM"]
    B --> C["FOR"]
    C --> D["NO"]
    D --> E["DEMO"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Tap Demo to try the ATEN Control System app. Tap Start to find a controller and download Viewers (see Overview, page 295).

Note: The default demo/start screen appears until a Viewer is downloaded to the Control System app. After a Viewer is downloaded, the default demo/start screen will reappear only if the app is reinstalled, which will also delete all Viewers.

The Demo page provides two sample Viewers. Tap either one to view the controls of different hardware devices.

To return to the demo/start page, tap Quit Demo at the top right corner.

WELCOME WinViewer 1 Demo

Select a Viewer or press any of the buttons on the Welcome page to demo the app. The first Viewer's name will depend on the OS of the device.

WinViewer1 / iPad / Android1

Conference Projector Screen Lighting

This demo shows a Conference call interface with controls for a Projector, Screen and Lighting. Tap any of the device icons to open each of the following control pages:

Projector VGA HDMI Projector Screen Light Screen Projector Screen Light Lighting 1 2 Projector Screen Light

Demo

This demo shows different buttons that can be pressed to control the Projector, Lights, Video Wall and Camera. Tap the icons to view control pages for each device. Tap the Quit Demo icon to return to the previous page, or press on the background until the logout dialog appears.

ATEN

Control Pages

PC1 PC2 VGA HESR ATEN

ATEN

ATEN Grid Subgrid ATEN

ATEN

The images above show control pages for the Projector, Lights, Video Wall and Camera in Demo. Tap the Home icon in the lower left corner to return to the previous page, or press on the background until the logout dialog appears. To return to the demo/start page, tap Quit Demo at the top right corner.

Overview

Welcome (List of Viewers) Page

The Welcome screen is the home screen of the ATEN Control System app. It lists downloaded Viewers and provides administrative options. Tap a Viewer to open the controls for a room (see Configuring the Control Interface (Viewer), page 127), or use the administrative options listed below.

WELCOME Viewer1 Moscow_Meetin Change mode

Control Description
	Manage Viewer – Use this page to add, update, and remove downloaded Viewers. See page 296 for details.
	Manage LAN Device – Use this page to access controller's web console or configure the network settings for controllers and the devices that they manage. See page 297 for details.
	Log Report – Use this page to lookup logs to troubleshoot connectivity issues. See page 302 for details.
	Preferences – Use this page to set a password for accessing the app or configure the app's usage settings. See page 303 for details.
	Settings – Use this page to access the system settings page of ATEN Touch Panel. This tab is only accessible when the Control System app is used on an ATEN Touch Panel.
	Information – This page provides information about the ATEN Control System's software version. See page 310 for details.

Manage Viewer

The Manage Viewer page allows you to add, update, and remove downloaded Viewers. To download Viewers, tap Add Viewer.

Manage Viewer Add Viewer Viewer1 Moscow_Meetin Update Remove Update Remove

Control Description
	Tap Add Viewer to download Viewers. See page 311 for details.
	Tap the Information icon to view the MAC Address, IP Address and Controller ID of the controller associated with the Viewer.
Update	Tap Update to connect to the controller and download an updated version of the Viewer. After the update, the “Downloaded Successfully” prompt will appear
Remove	Tap Remove to delete the Viewer. A dialog box will appear to confirm deletion of the Viewer.Tap Delete to remove the Viewer, or Cancel to cancel the deletion.Note: Viewers are only deleted on the mobile device, and will still be available on the controller.
Done Tap	Done to return to the Welcome page.

Manage LAN Device

The Manage LAN Device page allows you to edit network settings for the controllers and LAN devices added in the Configurator software

(see Device Library, page 126).

Manage LAN Device Device LAN Device Status VK2100-ID01 Device: 10.3.41.85

Control Description
	Tap to expand controllers to view connected LAN devices.
	Tap to open the web GUI (Chapter 3, Web-based Configuration and Control).

Depending on the LAN device you select, different options are available. Tap on a device to open the settings page. Use Edit to change settings, Apply to save or OK to exit.

Controller

Telnet

ONVIF

ONVIF Edit IP Address 192.168.11.12 Username User 82 Password Done

ONVIF IP Address 192.168.11.12 Username User 82 Password ****** Show Password Apply Cancel

TCP

TCP Device Edit IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Done

TCP Device IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Apply Cancel

UDP

UDP Device Edit IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Done

UDP Device IP Address 192.168.11.12 Port 4352 Apply Cancel

Simulating Viewer Controls with Demo Mode

You can preview Viewers and simulate control actions without connecting to a controller using the demo mode.

1. To simulate controls of a target Viewer, download the Viewer file. For details, see Download Viewer, page 311.

Note: If you wish to use built-in Viewers, skip this step.

1. Tap the ATEN Control app icon from your mobile device. This screen appears.

WELCOME VKT100

Note: If you have not downloaded any Viewers to the app, a Demo/Start page appears. Tap Demo to use built-in Viewers for the simulation.

1. Tap Settings . The Preferences page appears.
2. Tap Enable demo mode to select the setting and tap Set. Demo mode is immediately applied.
3. Tap to return to the Welcome page.

4. Tap a Viewer to view and try out its control interface.

5. To close the Viewer, long tap any space on the mobile device and click OK in a pop-up dialog box.

6. To disable demo mode, close the Viewer and then go to Settings to disable the demo mode setting.

Log Report

The Log Report page lists information and errors which can be used to troubleshoot issues. Tap and drag the list to scroll through the logs. Tap Back to exit.

Log Report Latest report 2017-05-17 10:20:40:848 [00001022] Loading...

Control Description
	Tap Save to save the log file.
	Tap Report History to view saved logs (see page 309).
	Tap Delete to delete the log information.
	Tap Back to exit.

Preferences

The Preferences page provides settings for operation preferences of the Control System app, access to Room Booking System, and AppSwitcher.

Preference General Advanced Button Sound disable Seconds to press before exit dialog appears 1 Seconds Screen Mode Always On Mn(s) Enable Password Protection Password Connect to ATEN Control System devices based on the Manage Device IP list Notify me when this app disconnects from the Internet. Show alert messages for Ethernet devices managed by the controller Demo mode Enable physical buttons on the Viewer device. Your device will restart upon applying this setting. Set

General

• Seconds to press before the exit dialog appears: This sets the duration of idle time. When the app idles for the specified duration, an Exit dialog appears to check if the user wants to close the app.
  Screen Mode

Note: This setting only takes effect on Viewer control pages.

• Screen saver: Select this option to start a screen saver when the mobile device has idled for the specified duration.
• Screen lock: Select this option for the mobile device to lock the screen based on its related setting on the mobile device.
• Always on: Select this option to have the screen on all the time.

- Enable password protection: To restrict access to app settings and prevent unwanted configuration, enable password authentication for leaving the control pages.

• Allow keyboard usage when this app is in full screen: Enable this option to allow keyboard operation when the app is in full screen.
• Notify me when this app disconnects from the Internet: Select this option to notify the user when the app disconnects from the Internet.
• Connect to ATEN Control System devices based on the Manage Device IP list: Select this option for the app to identify and connect to controllers by IP address instead of the controller ID. This is useful when you create projects by duplication, in which case you do not need to reconfigure the controller ID in each project.
• Show alert messages for Ethernet devices managed by the controller (only applicable to the iOS version of the app): Enable this setting to receive status notifications for the managed Ethernet devices.
• Always open viewers in full screen (only applicable to the Windows version of the app): Enable this setting to open Viewers (i.e. control pages, for examples see page 292) in full screen.
• Show minimize, maximize, and close buttons (only applicable to the Windows version of the app): Enable this setting to show the minimize, maximize, and close buttons at the top-right corner of a Viewer (i.e. control page, for examples see page 292).
• Enable demo mode: Select this setting to allow viewing of the control pages within the Viewer (with no actual effects) when no controller is connected.
• Enable physical buttons on Viewer device (only applicable to VK330): To prevent access to physical buttons on the touch panel, disable this setting.
• Use fast connection: Enable this setting for the Viewer to connect to its designated controller more quickly by skipping the checkup of extension boxes to the controller.

Receiving Room Usage Notifications from ATEN Room Booking System

You can receive notifications of room usage including check-in, check-out, and reservation extension on ATEN Touch Panel / Android mobile device as soon as the action is made.

This feature also requires management and configuration of ATEN Unizon. For more information, see ATEN Unizon User Manual. The Access to RBS control setting merely allows the device to be able to receive notifications from ATEN Unizon.

Allowing Room Usage Notifications

1. Go to Preferences > Advanced page, enable Access to RBS control to allow ATEN Unizon to send notifications to the mobile device.
2. (Optional) Enable/disable notification sound.
3. Tap Set to save the settings. The RBS control icon appears.

Remote RBS Control

You can check in, check out, or extend meeting reservation using ATEN Touch Panel / Android mobile device.

To allow these remote actions:

1. Go to Preferences > Advanced.
2. Enable the Access to RBS Control setting and tap Set.
   The RBS control icon appears.

AppSwitcher

You can maximize the usage of an ATEN Touch Panel (VK330) using AppSwitcher which allows you to install multiple apps (ATEN or third-party apps) on the Touch Panel and to switch apps should your need changes.

Adding Apps to ATEN Touch Panel And AppSwitcher

Follow the procedure below to install apps to an ATEN Touch Panel and to add them to AppSwitcher to make them available for switching.

1. Go to Preferences > Advanced, enable the Access to app switch setting.

AppSwitcher Access to app switch enable Installed Apps Web browser VE89 Control Email Crestron Add App Remove App

1. Tap Add App to install an app to the mobile device.

2. Tap C to refresh the list. The installed apps appear on the list.

3. To make an app available for switching, tap the app to add it to AppSwitcher. Apps added to AppSwitcher are marked with black icon. Tap again to unselect. You can add multiple apps to AppSwitcher.

4. Tap Set. The AppSwitcher control icon 📋 appears.

5. To uninstall an app, tap Remove App.

Using AppSwitcher

You can switch among the installed and added apps using AppSwitcher.

1. On your Viewer, find the AppSwitcher control

If you can not find the control, go to Preferences > Advanced page, enable the Access to app switch setting, and tap Set. The AppSwitcher control should appear.

1. Tap . A list of available apps appear.

Information Back to main control RoomBookingSystem Video Presentation Control VM APP Go to Preferences

1. Tap from the list to switch the control to the selected app. For example:

VK330 Room Info VP1421 - 604_VP1421 18:35s.25 Manually Connect Scan VP Devices

Note: If the app you wish to use is not in the list, tap Go to Preferences, and then make sure the app is installed and added to AppSwitcher. For detailed instructions, see Adding Apps to the Device and AppSwitcher, page 306.

1. To return to the previous control page, tap Back to main control.

Report History

When you tap Report History, you can view and export logs. Saved log files are listed by date in the left column. Tap a log file to view it in the window to the right. Tap and drag the list to scroll through the logs. Tap Back to exit.

Reports Apr 27, 2017 20170427_2.vklog 20170427 11:25 saved 20170427_1.vklog 20170427 11:20 saved Apr 26, 2017 20170426_2.vklog 20170426 15:42 saved 20170426_1.vklog 20170426 15:16 saved 2017-04-26 15:16:25.854 [20020903] Receive Quick Action FeedBack 2017-04-26 15:16:25.883 [00020112] Action Feedback: 4261415601 enable 2017-04-26 15:16:26.009 [00020006] Send Quick Action Request to (fe000ab1_press) 2017-04-26 15:16:26.009 [00020910] Send Quick Command 10.3.41.85 Success. 2017-04-26 15:16:26.157 [20020903] Receive Quick Action FeedBack 2017-04-26 15:16:26.203 [00020112] Action Feedback: 4261415601 enable 2017-04-26 15:16:26.322 [00020006] Send Quick Action Request to (fe000ab1_press) 2017-04-26 15:16:26.322 [00020910] Send Quick Command 10.3.41.85 Success. 2017-04-26 15:16:26.491 [20020903] Receive Quick Action FeedBack 2017-04-26 15:16:26.492 [00020112] Action Feedback: 4261415601 enable

Tap Export to send the log as an e-mail attachment.

Information

The Information page displays the ATEN Control System's version.

About ATEN ATEN Control System Version 2.1.207

Download Viewer

The Download Viewer page allows you to search for controllers and download Viewers. This page is accessed from Welcome→Manage Viewer→Add Viewer.

Download Viewer Profile Search for all controllers on the I Auto Search Search by IP address 000 000 000 000 Please select the viewer profile to download. Add Viewer Use Auto Search or Add IP to add the viewer. Download

Control Description
Search by IP Address	Tap to enter a controller's IP address, then tap the Search icon to find it. When controllers are found on the network, they are listed in the Add Viewer box.A Search History drop-down menu will appear for previously searched IP addresses.
Auto Search Auto S	Search allows you to search for controllers without specifying an IP address. The controller must be powered on and connected to the same local network.
Add Viewer This panel lists the controllers that have been found on the network. Each controller lists Viewers that can be downloaded to the mobile device. To upload Viewers to a controller, see The Upload Tab, page 245.
Back Icon Back returns you to the Welcome page.
Download After you	select the Viewers you want to download, click Download to start the process.

Downloading Viewers

When controllers are found, they appear in the Add Viewer panel. Check the boxes of the Viewers you would like to download, then tap Download.

Search for all controllers on the I Auto Search Search by IP address 000.000.000.000 Please select the viewer profile to download. VK2100 - ID01 ✓ Viewer! | All Rooms ✓ bret! | All Rooms Download

Control Description
Add Viewer The	main window lists the controllers that have been found on the network. Under each controller is a list of Viewers with a check box.Use the check boxes to select the Viewers you want to download, then clickDownload. If the Lock icon appears, you will be prompted to enter the access key.After Viewers download, the “Downloaded Successfully” prompt appears. TapDoneto return to the Welcome page where the Viewers will be listed.Note: After you download a Viewers to the mobile device, the default Welcome screen no longer appears.
Access Key	When the a Viewers requires an access key a window appears prompting you to enter the key. Enter the correct access key and then clickOKto download the Viewers from the controller. To set the access key, seeThe Upload Tab, page 245.
	Tap the Information icon to view theIP Address, MAC AddressandLicenseinformation of the controller. The license information provides the total number of licenses available and the number in use.

Overview

ATEN expansion boxes support SSH and can be configured via an SSH client such as PuTTY.

Establishing an SSH Session with Expansion Box

1. On a computer installed under the same network with the target ATEN Expansion Box, install an SSH client, e.g. PuTTY.
2. Run the SSH client.
3. Establish an SSH session with the target Expansion Box using the following settings:

◆ Port: 22
◆ IP address of the Expansion Box
- Access key of the Expansion Box

Note: If the session can not be established, log in the Expansion Box's web console to check if the access key needs to be changed.

1. Execute commands to configure and/or control the expansion box. For more information on commands, see:

◆ Command Syntax, page 314
◆ Command List, page 315

Command Syntax

◆ The general form of a command is:

command parameter<argument> {one|two|three} 

Notation Description
command	The name of the command is shown in bold.
parameter	Indicates the name of the parameter.
	Indicates the name of the value or the information that the user must provide. Only type the information in the angle brackets, not the brackets themselves.
[ ]	Indicates optional items. Only type the information in the brackets, not the brackets themselves.
{ }	Indicates a set of choices from which the user must choose one. Only type one of the choices in the brackets, not the brackets themselves.
|	Indicates two or more mutually exclusive choices in a command line. Only type one of the choices in the command line, not the symbol.

If you have two or more parameters, the order of these parameters among themselves does not affect the result of the operation. For example, both of the following commands execute the same task:

command name + parameter 1 + parameter 2

command name + parameter 2 + parameter 1

Command List

Configuring Serial Settings

◆ Function

Configure or display ATEN Expansion Boxes' serial settings.

- Syntax

serial [p] [type ] [baud ] [dbit ] [parity ] [sbit ] [fctrl ] [dtype ] [endchar ] [acktimeout ] [control ]

◆ Command & Parameters

Function Command/Parameter Input (argument)
To display current settings for all serial ports when the command is used on its own.	serial N/A
To specify the serial port(s) for the command action.	p<port number> p01: port 1p01, 02: port 1 and 2p*: all portsp: all ports
To specify the type of serial interface.	type <serialinterface>	232, 422, 485
To set the baud rate. baud	300, 600	1200,2400, 4800, 9600,19200, 38400,57600, 115200
To set the databit. dbit	7, 8
To set the serial parity. parity	none, even, odd
To set the stop bit. sbit	1, 2
To set the flow control. fctrl	none, hw
To specify the data type (ASCII or HEX).	dtype <datatype> ascii, hexNote: If this parameter is not specified, the default setting is ascii.
To set the timeout duration.	acktimeout	Specify the timeout duration in milliseconds.
To specify the end-of-text character.	endcharSpecify	the end-of-text character for the connected device.
To display the log of the target port in the specified data format.	read N/A
To send data from the specified port.	writee.g. “abc123”
To send data from the specified port and request feedback.	sendackN/A

Examples

serial: display the current settings for all serial ports

serial p01 type 232 baud 115200 dbit 8 parity none sbit 1 fctrl none: set port 1 to the specified settings.

serial p01, 04, 07 baud 9600: set the baud rate of port 1, 4, and 7 to 9600.

serial p02 dtype hex read: display the log for port 2 in hex format

Configuring Relay Settings

◆ Function

Configure or display ATEN Expansion Boxes' relay settings.

- Syntax

relay [r] [tpulse ] [on|off|pulse|toggle|read]

◆ Command & Parameters

Function Command	/Parameter Input (argument)
To display current settings for all relay ports when the command is used on its own.	relay N/A
To specify the relay port(s) for the command action.	r<port number> r01: port 1r01,02: port 1 and 2r*: all portsr: all ports
To turn the specified relay port(s) on.	open N/A
To turn the specified relay port(s) off.	close N/A
To turn off one or more relay port(s) for the specified duration.	tpulsetpulse 500: turn the relay off for 500 ms and then turn it back on.
To turn the relay port off and then back on.	pulse N/A
To change the status of the specified relay port(s), for example, from on to off, or vice versa.	toggle N/A
To display settings for the specified relay port(s)	read N/A

◆ Examples (full commands)

relay: display the current settings for all relay ports.

relay r*: display current settings for all relay ports.

relay r01 open: Turn relay port 1 on.

relay r01, 04, 07, 12 close: turn port 1, 4, 7 and 12 off.

relay r02 tpulse 500 pulse: turn off port 2 for 500 milliseconds and then turn it back on.

relay r02 read: display the current settings for port 2.

Configuring I/O Settings

◆ Function

Configure or display ATEN Expansion Boxes' digital input/output settings.

- Syntax

io [p] [type ] [lthresh ] [hthresh ] [tpulse ] [high|low|pulse|toggle|read]

◆ Command & Parameters

Function Command	d/Parameter Input (argument)
To display current settings for all digital I/O ports when the command is used on its own.	io N/A
To specify the I/O port(s) for the command action.	p	p01: port 1p01, 02: port 1 and 2p*: all portsp: all ports
To specify the I/O type.	type	vdc: VDC inputdout: digital outputdry: dry contact
To specify the low-bound voltage threshold.	lthreshN/A
To specify the high-bound voltage threshold.	hthreshN/A
To specify the duration that the specified port(s) remain disabled.	tpulseN/A
Function Command	d/Parameter Input (argument)
To disable the specified port(s) by opening the circuit with a high voltage.	open N/A
To enable the specified port(s) by closing the circuit with a low voltage.	close N/A
To turn the I/O port(s) off and then back on.	pulse N/A
To change the status of the specified digital I/O port(s), for example, from on to off, or vice versa.	toggle N/A
To display settings for the specified relay port(s).	read N/A

◆ Examples (full commands)

io: display the current settings for all digital I/O ports.

io p*: display current settings for all digital I/O ports.

io p01 type din lthresh 1 hthresh 3: Set the low voltage to 1 and high voltage to 3 for port 1.

io r01, 04, 07, 12 close: Enable port 1, 4, 7, and 12 by closing the circuits of these ports.

io r02 tpulse 500 pulse: turn off port 2 for 500 milliseconds and then turn it back on.

io r02 read: display the current settings of port 2.

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Appendix

Safety Instructions

General

• Read all of these instructions. Save them for future reference.
  ◆ Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the device.
• This product is for indoor use only.
• Do not place the device on any unstable surface (cart, stand, table, etc.). If the device falls, serious damage will result.
• Caution: Risk of explosion if the battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Always dispose of used batteries according to the proper instructions.
  ♦ Do not use the device near water.
• Do not place the device near, or over, radiators or heat registers.
• The device cabinet is provided with slots and openings to allow for adequate ventilation. To ensure reliable operation, and to protect against overheating, these openings must never be blocked or covered.
• The device should never be placed on a soft surface (bed, sofa, rug, etc.) as this will block its ventilation openings. Likewise, the device should not be placed in a built-in enclosure unless adequate ventilation has been provided.
• Never spill liquid of any kind on the device.
• Unplug the device from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
• The device should be operated from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local power company.
• To prevent damage to your installation it is important that all devices are properly grounded.
• Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord or cables. Route the power cord and cables so that they cannot be stepped on or tripped over.
• Position system cables and power cables carefully; Be sure that nothing rests on any cables.

• Never push objects of any kind into or through cabinet slots. They may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire or electrical shock.

• Do not attempt to service the device yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

• If the following conditions occur, unplug the device from the wall outlet and bring it to qualified service personnel for repair.

• The power cord or plug has become damaged or frayed.
  ◆ Liquid has been spilled into the device.

• The device has been exposed to rain or water.
• The device has been dropped, or the cabinet has been damaged.
• The device exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.
• The device does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.

- Only adjust those controls that are covered in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage that will require extensive work by a qualified technician to repair.

- Avoid circuit overloads. Before connecting equipment to a circuit, know the power supply’s limit and never exceed it. Always review the electrical specifications of a circuit to ensure that you are not creating a dangerous condition or that one doesn’t already exist. Circuit overloads can cause a fire and destroy equipment.

Rack Mount

• Before working on the rack, make sure that the stabilizers are secured to the rack, extended to the floor, and that the full weight of the rack rests on the floor. Install front and side stabilizers on a single rack or front stabilizers for joined multiple racks before working on the rack.
• Always load the rack from the bottom up, and load the heaviest item in the rack first.
• Make sure that the rack is level and stable before extending a device from the rack.
• Use caution when pressing the device rail release latches and sliding a device into or out of a rack; the slide rails can pinch your fingers.
• After a device is inserted into the rack, carefully extend the rail into a locking position, and then slide the device into the rack.
• Do not overload the AC supply branch circuit that provides power to the rack. The total rack load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating.
• Make sure that all equipment used on the rack – including power strips and other electrical connectors – is properly grounded.
• Ensure that proper airflow is provided to devices in the rack.
• Ensure that the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment does not exceed the maximum ambient temperature specified for the equipment by the manufacturer.
• Do not step on or stand on any device when servicing other devices in a rack.

Technical Support

International

• For online technical support – including troubleshooting, documentation, and software updates: http://eservice.aten.com
• For telephone support, see Telephone Support, page iv:

North America

Email Support [e-mail]
Online Technical Support	Troubleshooting Documentation Software Updates	https://eservice.aten.com
Telephone Support 1-888-999-ATEN		ext 4988

When you contact us, please have the following information ready beforehand:

◆ Product model number, serial number, and date of purchase.
- Your computer configuration, including operating system, revision level, expansion cards, and software.
◆ Any error messages displayed at the time the error occurred.
- The sequence of operations that led up to the error.
◆ Any other information you feel may be of help.

Specifications

	VK0100 VK0200
Interface
Keypad Layout Up to 14	layout variations using 4 ~ 8 buttons	Up to 125 layout variations using 6 ~ 12 buttons
Serial • 2 x Bidirectional	RS-232 Port (2 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2Parity: None (default), even or odd
Relay • 2 x Relay Channel	el (2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally open, isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 VDC, 1A
Digital Input • 1 x Digital	Input Channel (1 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connector);VDC Mode- Input Voltage Range: 0 to 5 V DC- Programmable Range: 1 to 5 V DCDry Contact Mode-Pull-up 2k ohms to + 5 V DC
Ethernet • 1 x RJ-45 Female	Male, 10/100Base-TSupported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches & Buttons
Controller ID Switch 1 x	16-segment Switch
Reset Button 1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption DC	5V : 1.1W : 5 BTU/hPoE : 1.375 W : 6 BTU/h	DC 5V : 1.15W : 5 BTU/hPoE : 1.44 W / 7 BTU/h

VK0100 VK0200

Note:

• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.
• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.

Environmental
Operating Temperature	0 – 50 °C
Storage Temperature –20 – 60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-Condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Plastic
Weight 0.16 kg (0.35 lb)	0.19 kg (0.42 lb)
Dimensions 11.63 x 7.06	6 x 4.84 cm(4.58 x 2.78 x 1.91 in)	8.32 x 14.76 x 4.84 cm(3.28 x 5.81 x 1.91 in)
Mobile Control License
No. of free licenses 0
Max. no. of paid licenses	10
Note: Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Pad for remote control, one license on the Control Pad will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Pad, contact your local sales representative for more information.
	VK108US VK112EU
Interface
Keypad Layout Up to 14 layout variations using 4 ~ 8 buttons		Up to 125 layout variations using 6 ~ 12 buttons
Ethernet • 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T• Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS• DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches & Buttons
Controller ID Switch 1 x 16-segment switch
Keypad ID Switch 1 x 8-segment switch
Reset Button
1 x semi-recessed pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption DC 5V : 1.25W : 6 BTU/hDC 48V : 1.58W : 7BTU/h		DC 5V : 1.25W : 6 BTU/hPoE: 1.56W : 7BTU/h
Note:• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 - 50 °C
Storage Temperature -20 - 60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-Condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Plastic
Weight 0.13 kg (0.29 lb) 0.17 kg (0.37 lb)
Device Dimensions	11.63 x 7.06 x 4.84 cm(4.58 x 2.78 x 1.91 in)	8.32 x 14.76 x 4.80 cm(3.28 x 5.81 x 1.89 in)
Faceplate Dimensions	11.92 x 7.42 x 0.92 cm(4.69 x 2.92 x 0.36 in)	8.62 x 15.12 x 0.92 cm(3.39 x 5.95 x 0.36 in)

VK1100A
Memory
SDRAM 512 MB
Flash 8 GB
Interfaces
Serial 1 x Programmable	bidirectionalRS-232/422/485 port (1 x 5-pole terminal block connector, configurable via pin assignments)◆ Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) or RTS/CTS1 x bidirectional RS-232 port(1 x 3-pole terminal block connector)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd
IR/Serial 2 x Programmable	IR / UnidirectionalRS-232 Ports (2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
	IR:◆ Carrier Frequency: 10 ~ 455 kHz◆ Signal Level: TTL (0 ~ 5 V DC)
	Serial:◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Signal Level: TTL (0 ~ 5 V DC)

VK1100A

I/O 2 x Programmable Digital Input / Output Channels(1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)
Relay	4 x Relay Channels (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally Open, Isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC	1 x 12 V DC Output Port (1 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A Max
Ethernet	2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-TSupported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
Switches
Power 1 x on/off Switch
IR Learning
1 x IR Receiver LED
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton
VK1100A
Power
Power Consumption AC	110 V : 4.3 W : 82 BTU/hAC 220 V : 4.5 W : 83 BTU/h
Note:◆ The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.◆ The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.
Maximum Input Power Rating	internal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0	-50 °C
Storage Temperature -20	-60 °C
Humidity 0 - 80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 1.19 kg
Dimensions (L x W x H)	21.50 x 16.23 x 4.18 cm
Mobile Control License
No. of free licenses 2
Max. no. of licenses 16
Note: The ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box Gen. 2 for remote control, one license on the Control Box Gen. 2 will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK1200
System
SD RAM 1 GB
Flash Memory 8 GB
Interface
Serial 1 x Programmable bidirectionalRS-232/422/485 port (1 x 5-pole terminal block connector)1 x Programmable bidirectional RS-232 port(1 x 3-pole terminal block connector)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even, or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) RTS/CTS (for 5-pole terminal block)
IR/Serial 2 x Programmable IR / UnidirectionalRS-232 Ports (2 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
I/O 2 x Programmable Digital Input / Output Channels(1 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)
Relay	4 x Relay Channels (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally Open, Isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC	1 x 12 V DC Output Port (1 x 2-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)Power Supply: 12 V DC, 1 A Max
Ethernet	2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-TSupported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
LCD Panel
Size 1.6"
LCM Display 64 x 128 resolution
LCM Setting 3 x Pushbuttons (Up, Down, Enter)
Switches
Power 1 x on/off Switch
IR Learning

VK1200

1 x IR Receiver LED

Reset Button

1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton

Power

Power Consumption AC 1	10 V : 4.7 W : 81 BTU/h
	AC 220 V : 4.5 W : 81 BTU/h

Note:

• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.
• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.

Maximum Input Power Rating

internal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz

Environmental

Operating Temperature 0–50 °C

Storage Temperature -20-60 °C

Humidity 0 – 80% RH, Non-condensing

Physical Properties

Housing Metal

Weight 1.23 kg

Dimensions (L x W x H) 20.00 x 16.41 x 4.40 cm

Mobile Control License

No, of free licenses 2

Max. no. of licenses 32

Note: The ATEN Control Box comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box for remote control, one license on the Control Box will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.

VK2200
System
SDRAM 2 GB
Flash Memory 8 GB
Interface
Serial 2 x Bidirectional RS-232/422/485 Ports(2 x 5-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even or Odd◆ Flow Control: None (default) or RTS/CTS6 x Programmable Bidirectional RS-232 Ports(6 x 3-Pole Terminal Block Connector)◆ Baud Rate: 300 ~ 115200 (default: 9600)◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7◆ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2◆ Parity: None (default), Even or Odd
IR/Serial 8 x Programmable IR / Unidirectional RS-232Ports (4 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)

VK2200

I/O 8 x Programmable Digital Input / OutputChannels (2 x 5-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)
Relay	8 x Relay Channels (4 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connector)Normally Open, Isolated RelaysContact Rating: Max 24 V DC, 2 A
V DC	4 x 12 V DC Output Ports (2 x 4-Pole Terminal Block Connectors)Power Supply: 12 V DC, 2 A Max (Shared By 4 Ports)
Ethernet	2 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100/1000 Base-TSupported protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60 / 192.168.1.60 for Control LAN / LAN, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
USB 1 x USB Type-A
LCD Panel
Size 1.6"
LCM Display 64 x 128 resolution
LCM Setting 3 x Pushbuttons (Up, Down, Enter)
Switches
Power 1 x on/off switch
IR Learning
VK2200
1 x IR Receiver LED
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed pushbutton
Power
Power Consumption AC 1	10 V : 5.7 W : 139 BTU/hAC 220 V : 6.8 W : 144 BTU/h
Note:The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.
Max. Input Power Rating Internal power: 100 - 240 V AC, 50 - 60 Hz
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0 – 50 °C
Storage Temperature -20 – 60 °C
Humidity 0 – 80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Weight 2.62 kg
Dimensions (L x W x H) 43	.24 x 16.32 x 4.40 cm
Mobile Control License
No, of free licenses 2
Max. no. of licenses 32
Note: The ATEN Control Box comes with two free licenses which are stored in the device itself. Each time a mobile device connects to an ATEN Control Box for remote control, one license on the Control Box will be occupied. To purchase and add additional licenses to your ATEN Control Box, contact your local sales representative for more information.
VK320
Processor
Quad-core
Memory
SDRAM 2GB
Flash 32GB
Panel
Display Type IPS-LCD
Size 8"
Touch Screen Capacitive
Resolution 1280 x 800
Aspect Ratio 16:10
Color Depth 8 bit
Contrast Ratio 800:1
Backlight LCD
Viewing Angle ±85° (H), ±85° (V)
Luminance	300 cd/m2
Interfaces
Ethernet 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100 BaseT
USB 1 x USB Type-C
Power
Power over Ethernet (PoE)	802.3 at PoE+
Power Consumption	DC12V : 12W : 40.95 BTU/hPoE: 14.1W : 4801 BTU/h

Note:

• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.
• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.

Environmental

VK320
Operating Temperature	0–40 °C
Storage Temperature	-10–55 °C
Humidity 10–75% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Plastic
Weight 0.33 kg (0.73 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H)	20.01 x 12.46 x 3.77 cm (7.88 x 4.91 x 1.48 in.)
VK330
Processor
Quad-core
Memory
SDRAM 2 GB
Flash 16 GB
Panel Specifications
Display Type TFT-LCD
Size 10.1"
Touch Screen Capacitive
Resolution 1280 x 800
Aspect Ratio 16:10
Color Depth 8 bit
Contrast Ratio 800:1
Backlight LED
Viewing Angle ±85° (H), ±85° (V)
Luminance 500 cd/m2
Interfaces
Ethernet 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/	100/1000 BaseT
USB	1 x USB Type-A
Power
Power over Ethernet (PoE)	802.3 at PoE+
Power Consumption	DC 12V : 12.8W :43.65 BTU/hPoE:14W:47.77BTU

Note:

• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.
• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.

Environmental
Operating Temperature	0–40 °C
Storage Temperature	-10–55 °C
VK330
Humidity 10–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing ABS + PC
Weight 0.62 kg (1.37 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 25.22 x 17.78 x 2.45 cm (9.93 x 7 x 0.96 in.)

VK401
Mode of Operation (Frequency)
13.56 MHz
Interface
Connector Type Pogo pin
Industrial Protocols
ISO 14443A/B, ISO 15693, Mifare, Felica (Card UID)
Sensing Distance
Up to 30 mm (depends on the tag type)
Environmental
Operational Temperature 0 – 40 °C
Physical Properties
Housing Plastic
Weight 0.03 kg (0.08 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 5.60 x	7.00 x 2.33 cm

VK224

Interfaces

Serial 4 x programmable, bi-directional RS-232/422/485

ports (4 x DB9 Male Connector, configurable via pin assignments)

◆ Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)
◆ Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7
♦ Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2
♦ Parity: None (default), Even or Odd
◆ Flow Control: None (default) RTS/CTS

RS-232

Pin 2: RX
Pin 3: TX
Pin 5: GND
Pin 7: RTS
Pin 8: CTS

RS-422

◆ Pin 1: RX-
Pin 2: RX+
Pin 3: TX+
Pin 4: TX-
Pin 5: GND

RS-485

Pin 3: D+
Pin 4: D-
◆ Pin 5: GND*

Note: A ground terminal connection is recommended but not required.

Ethernet

◆ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T
◆ Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH
DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.

VK224

Switches

Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch

Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch

Reset Button

1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton

USB

1 x USB Type A

Power Consumption

DC5V:3.8W:28BTU/h; DC48V:4.75W:33BTU/h

Note:

• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.
• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.

Environmental
Operating Temperature	0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20	-60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.45 kg (0.99 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H)	13.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (5.12 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)
VK236
Interfaces
IR/Serial 6 x Programmable	IR / Uni-directional RS-232 Port6 x 2-Pole Terminal Block ConnectorIR: TTL level (0 to 5 V)Carrier Frequency: 10KHz~455KHz;Serial: Uni-directional RS-232 (+ - 5 V)Baud Rate: 300 to 115200 (default: 9600)Data Bit: 8 (default) or 7Stop Bit: 1 (default) or 2Parity: None (default), Even or Odd
Ethernet	1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-TSupported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSHDHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A (firmware upgrades only)
Power Consumption
DC5V:1.31W:17BTU/h;DC48V:1.64W:18BTU/h
Note:The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20–60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.45 kg (0.99 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 1	3.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (5.12 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)

VK248
Interfaces
Relay	♦ 8 normally open relays (8 x 2-pole terminal block)♦ Contact Rating: Max 24 VDC, 2A
Ethernet	♦ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T♦ Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH♦ DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A (firmware upgrades only)
Power Consumption

VK248

DC5V:2.82W:24BTU/h;

DC48V:3.53W:27BTU/h

Note:

• The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.
• The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.

Environmental
Operating Temperature 0	-50 °C
Storage Temperature -20	-60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non	-condensing
Power Output
12 VDC, 300mA
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.65 kg (1.43 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 2	0.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (7.87 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)
VK258
Interfaces
Relay	◆ 8 x Programmable Digital Input / Output Channel◆ Digital Input◆ VDC ModeInput Voltage Range: 0 to 24 VDCProgrammable Range: 1 to 24 VDC◆ Dry Contact ModePull-up 2k ohms to +12 VDC◆ Digital Output: 300 mA sink from 24 VDC
Ethernet	◆ 1 x RJ-45 Female, 10/100Base-T◆ Supported Protocol: ARP, ICMP, TCP/IP, DHCP, HTTPS, SSH◆ DHCP-enabled. Default IP settings (IP address 192.168.0.60, subnet mask 255.255.255.0) will be automatically applied if no IP address is assigned within 30 seconds of connecting to the network.
Switches
Controller ID 1 x 16-segment Switch
Expansion Box ID 1 x 8-segment Switch
Reset Button
1 x Semi-recessed Pushbutton
USB
1 x USB Type A (firmware upgrades only)
Power
Power Consumption DC	5V:2.2W:36BTU/h; PoE:2.75W:39BTU/h
Note:◆ The measurement in Watts indicates the typical power consumption of the device with no external loading.◆ The measurement in BTU/h indicates the power consumption of the device when it is fully loaded.
Power Output 12 VDC,	300 mA
Environmental
Operating Temperature 0–50 °C
Storage Temperature -20–60 °C
Humidity 0–80% RH, Non-condensing
Physical Properties
Housing Metal
Metal 0.46 kg (1.01 lb)
Dimensions (L x W x H)	13.00 x 7.58 x 4.20 cm (5.12 x 2.98 x 1.65 in.)

Control System Project Specifications
Project Elements Maximum Number
Managed IP devices	VK0100 / VK0200 8
	VK1100A / VK2100A 25
	VK1200 / VK2200 64
Rooms 16
Viewers 32
Macros		1024
Variables		1024
monitoring event	VK0100 / VK0200 10
	VK1100A / VK2100A 20
	VK1200 / VK2200 40
scheduling event	VK1100A / VK2100A	60
	VK1200 / VK2200
Viewer pages		160 per Viewer
control objects		320 per page
commands		128 per button

CAD Drawings

ATEN

VK0100

ATEN

VK0100

ATEN

VK0100

Panel Mount Cutout

Width of faceplate = 7.4 cm [2.92"] Height of faceplate = 11.9 cm [4.69"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] 7.2 cm [2.83"] 8.4 cm [3.31"] Cutout Area 1.8 cm [0.71"]

Note: ATEN recommends a 1-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK0100

CAD Drawings

(512cm (3.95") (652cm (3.89)) (325cm (0.36)

ATEN

VK0200

ATEN

VK0200

ATEN

VK0200

Panel Mount Cutout

Width of faceplate = 15.1 cm [5.95"] Height of faceplate = 8.6 cm [3.39"] 10.1 cm [3.98"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] Cutout Area

Note: ATEN recommends a 2-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK0200

CAD Drawings

ATEN

VK108US

ATEN

VK108US

ATEN

VK108US

Panel Mount Cutout

Width of faceplate = 7.4 cm [2.92"] Height of faceplate = 11.9 cm [4.69"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] 7.2 cm [2.83"] 8.4 cm [3.31"] Cutout Area 1.8 cm [0.71"]

Note: ATEN recommends a 1-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK108US

CAD Drawings

15.12cm (5.95") 6.62cm (1.97) 0.92cm (0.36)

ATEN

VK112EU

ATEN

VK112EU

ATEN

VK112EU

Panel Mount Cutout

Width of faceplate = 15.1 cm [5.95"] Height of faceplate = 8.6 cm [3.39"] 10.1 cm [3.98"] 5.4 cm [2.13"] Cutout Area

Note: ATEN recommends a 2-gang wall box with a depth of at least 5 cm (1.97 inches) to accommodate the connectors and cables.

ATEN

VK112EU

Datapoint Types

ATEN Control System supports the following KNX Datapoint Types (DPT):

DPT ID DPT Format DPT Name
1.001 B	1	DPT_Switch
1.002 B	1	DPT_Bool
1.003 B	1	DPT_Enable
1.004 B	1	DPT_Ramp
1.005 B	1	DPT_Alarm
1.006 B	1	DPT_BinaryValue
1.007 B	1	DPT_Step
1.008 B	1	DPTUpDown
1.009 B	1	DPT_OpenClose
1.010 B	1	DPT_Start
1.011 B	1	DPT_State
1.012 B	1	DPT_Invert
1.013 B	1	DPT_DimSendStyle
1.014 B	1	DPT_InputSource
1.015 B	1	DPT_Reset
1.016 B	1	DPT_Ack
1.017 B	1	DPT_Trigger
1.018 B	1	DPT_Occupancy
1.019 B	1	DPT_Window_Door
1.021 B	1	DPT_LogicalFunction
1.022 B	1	DPT_Scene_AB
1.023 B	1	DPT_ShutterBlinds_Mode
1.100 B	1	DPT_Heat/Cool
2.001 B	2	DPT_Switch_Control
2.002 B	2	DPT_Bool_Control
2.003 B	2	DPT_Enable_Control
2.004 B	2	DPT_Ramp_Control
2.005 B	2	DPT_Alarm_Control
2.006 B	2	DPT_BinaryValue_Control
2.007 B	2	DPT_Step_Control
2.008 B	2	DPT_Direction1_Control
2.009 B	2	DPT_Direction2_Control
2.010 B	2	DPT_Start_Control
2.011 B	2	DPT_State_Control
2.012 B	2	DPT_Invert_Control
3.007 B	_1U_3	DPT_Control_Dimming
3.008 B	_1U_3	DPT_Control_Blinds
4.001 A	8	DPT_ASCII
4.002 A	8	DPT_Char_8859_1
5.001 U	8	DPT_Scaling
5.003 U	8	DPT_Angle
5.004 U	8	DPT_Percent_U8
5.005 U	8	DPT_DecimalFactor
5.006 U	8	DPT_Tariff
5.010 U	8	DPT_Value_1_Ucount
6.001 V	8	DPT_Percent_V8
6.010 V	8	DPT_Value_1_Count
6.020 B	_5N_3	DPT_Status_Mode3
7.013 U	16	DPT_Brightness
8.011 V	16	DPT_Rotation_Angle
9.001 F	16	DPT_Value_Temp
18.001 B	_1R_1U_6	DPT_SceneControl
20.100 N	8	DPT_FuelType
20.101 N	8	DPT_BurnerType
20.102 N	8	DPT_HVACMode
20.103 N	8	DPT_DHWMode
20.104 N	8	DPT_LoadPriority
20.105 N	8	DPT_HVACContrMode
20.106 N	8	DPT_HVACEmergMode
20.107 N	8	DPT_ChangeoverMode
20.108 N	8	DPT_ValveMode
20.109 N	8	DPT_DamperMode
20.110 N	8	DPT_HeaterMode
20.111 N	8	DPT_FanMode
20.112 N	8	DPT_MasterSlaveMode
20.113 N	8	DPT_StatusRoomSetp
23.001 N	2	DPT_OnOff_Action
23.002 N	2	DPT_Alarm_Reaction
23.003 N	2	DPTUpDown_Action
23.102 N	2	DPT_HVAC_PB_Action

ATEN Control Box Reset Button

The reset button on ATEN Control Boxes can be used to reset system settings as described below.

Reset Button Functions
Control Box ON/OFF	Operation Description
ON Short press	Resets the Control Box's network	settings.
	Press and hold until the front panel LEDs blink once, with the buzzer beeping once (about 8 seconds)	Resets all settings back to factory default (deleting all Viewers, Projects, and account/password) but retains the network and license settings.
OFF While pressing	singing and holding, turn on the Control Box, and release when the buzzer beeps once, with the front panel LEDs blinking.	Enters Recovery Mode without resetting the Control Box's settings.
	While pressing and holding, turn on the Control Box, and release when the buzzer beeps twice, with the front panel LEDs blinking.	Resets all settings back to factory default but retains the license settings, and enters Recovery Mode.
	While pressing and holding, turn on the Control Box, and release when the buzzer beeps 3 times, with the front panel LEDs blinking.	Resets all of the Control Box's settings, including Viewers, Projects, account/password, network, and licenses.

Windows OS Button Limitation

There is a limitation for overlapping buttons when adding buttons for a Viewer to be used on Windows mobile devices. When two or more buttons are layered on one another, such as (A) on top of (B), users are unable to press the top most button (A), and instead triggers the bottom button (B) every time trying to press (A). To resolve this issue, copy the top most button (A), and add the duplicate (C) under both (A) and (B) on the Viewer.

MEETING We customized several ATEN classic meeting profile. LIGHT You could control all the lighting area in this war room. PROJECTION Any sources you want to show, just click here to switch. TV WALL You could change the layout of this 4 X 2 video wall. CAMERA Here to check and control the IP-based camera on the ceiling.

When the top button (A) is pressed, the lowest button (C) is executed.

ATEN Standard Warranty Policy

Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN warrants its hardware in the country of purchase against flaws in materials and workmanship for a Warranty Period of two [2] years (warranty period may vary in certain regions/countries) commencing on the date of original purchase. This warranty period includes the LCD panel of ATEN LCD KVM switches. Select products are warranted for an additional year (see A+ Warranty for further details). Cables and accessories are not covered by the Standard Warranty.

What is covered by the Limited Hardware Warranty

ATEN will provide a repair service, without charge, during the Warranty Period. If a product is detective, ATEN will, at its discretion, have the option to (1) repair said product with new or repaired components, or (2) replace the entire product with an identical product or with a similar product which fulfills the same function as the defective product. Replaced products assume the warranty of the original product for the remaining period or a period of 90 days, whichever is longer. When the products or components are replaced, the replacing articles shall become customer property and the replaced articles shall become the property of ATEN.

To learn more about our warranty policies, please visit our website: http://www.aten.com/global/en/legal/policies/warranty-policy/

© Copyright 2024 ATEN® International Co., Ltd.

Released: 2024-08-13

ATEN and the ATEN logo are registered trademarks of ATEN International Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. All other brand names and trademarks are the registered property of their respective owners.